Lexmark MX611DE Printer User`s guide

Add to my manuals
265 Pages

advertisement

Lexmark MX611DE Printer User`s guide | Manualzz

MX310 Series

User's Guide

June 2012

Machine type(s):

7015

Model(s):

270

www.lexmark.com

Contents

Contents

Safety information.......................................................................................6

Learning about the printer...........................................................................8

Finding information about the printer......................................................................................................8

Selecting a location for the printer............................................................................................................9

Printer configurations.............................................................................................................................10

Understanding the basic functions of the scanner..................................................................................11

Using the ADF and scanner glass.............................................................................................................12

Using the printer control panel...............................................................................................................13

Understanding the colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights........................................................13

Additional printer setup.............................................................................15

Installing internal options........................................................................................................................15

Installing hardware options.....................................................................................................................19

Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................22

Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................23

Networking..............................................................................................................................................24

Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................29

Loading paper and specialty media............................................................30

Setting the paper size and type...............................................................................................................30

Configuring Universal paper settings......................................................................................................30

Loading trays...........................................................................................................................................30

Loading the multipurpose feeder............................................................................................................35

Linking and unlinking trays......................................................................................................................39

Paper and specialty media guide................................................................42

Paper guidelines......................................................................................................................................42

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.............................................................................................45

Using specialty media..............................................................................................................................47

Storing paper...........................................................................................................................................49

Printing......................................................................................................51

Printing a document................................................................................................................................51

Printing confidential and other held jobs................................................................................................52

2

Contents

Printing information pages......................................................................................................................54

Canceling a print job................................................................................................................................54

Copying......................................................................................................56

Making copies.........................................................................................................................................56

Copying photos........................................................................................................................................57

Copying on specialty media.....................................................................................................................57

Customizing copy settings.......................................................................................................................59

Placing information on copies.................................................................................................................64

Canceling a copy job................................................................................................................................65

Understanding the copy options.............................................................................................................65

E-mailing....................................................................................................68

Setting up the printer to e-mail...............................................................................................................68

Creating an e-mail shortcut.....................................................................................................................69

E-mailing a document..............................................................................................................................69

Canceling an e-mail.................................................................................................................................70

Faxing........................................................................................................71

Setting up the printer to fax....................................................................................................................71

Sending a fax...........................................................................................................................................85

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server...................................................87

Customizing fax settings..........................................................................................................................88

Canceling an outgoing fax.......................................................................................................................89

Holding and forwarding faxes.................................................................................................................90

Understanding the fax options................................................................................................................91

Scanning....................................................................................................93

Scanning to an FTP address.....................................................................................................................93

Scanning to a computer..........................................................................................................................95

Understanding printer menus....................................................................97

Menus list................................................................................................................................................97

Paper menu.............................................................................................................................................98

Reports menu........................................................................................................................................107

Network/Ports menu.............................................................................................................................108

Security menu.......................................................................................................................................114

Settings menu........................................................................................................................................116

3

Contents

Help menu.............................................................................................................................................144

Saving money and the environment.........................................................146

Saving paper and toner.........................................................................................................................146

Saving energy........................................................................................................................................147

Recycling................................................................................................................................................150

Securing the printer..................................................................................152

Statement of Volatility..........................................................................................................................152

Erasing volatile memory........................................................................................................................152

Erasing non

‑volatile memory................................................................................................................152

Finding printer security information.....................................................................................................153

Maintaining the printer............................................................................154

Cleaning the printer parts.....................................................................................................................154

Checking the status of parts and supplies.............................................................................................156

Estimated number of remaining pages.................................................................................................156

Ordering supplies..................................................................................................................................157

Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................159

Replacing supplies.................................................................................................................................159

Moving the printer................................................................................................................................163

Managing the printer...............................................................................165

Finding advanced networking and administrator information.............................................................165

Checking the virtual display...................................................................................................................165

Setting up e

‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................165

Viewing reports.....................................................................................................................................165

Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server.......................................................166

Restoring factory default settings.........................................................................................................167

Clearing jams............................................................................................168

Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................168

Understanding jam messages and locations.........................................................................................169

[x]

‑page jam, open front door. [20y.xx]................................................................................................171

[x]

‑page jam, open rear door. [20y.xx]..................................................................................................174

[x]

‑page jam, clear standard bin. [20y.xx].............................................................................................175

[x]

‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx]...........................................................................176

[x]

‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24y.xx].....................................................................................................177

4

Contents

[x]

‑page jam, clear manual feeder. [25y.xx]..........................................................................................178

[x]

‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx].....................................................................179

Troubleshooting.......................................................................................181

Understanding printer messages..........................................................................................................181

Solving printer problems.......................................................................................................................195

Solving print problems..........................................................................................................................200

Solving copy problems..........................................................................................................................224

Solving fax problems.............................................................................................................................227

Solving scanner problems.....................................................................................................................233

Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................237

Contacting customer support................................................................................................................238

Notices.....................................................................................................240

Product information..............................................................................................................................240

Edition notice........................................................................................................................................240

Power consumption..............................................................................................................................244

Index........................................................................................................256

5

Safety information

Safety information

Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.

Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.

Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.

This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.

You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.

Use only the telecommunications (RJ

‑11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.

Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity tray and an input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see

www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters

.

6

Safety information 7

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:

Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.

If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.

Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.

Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.

Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Learning about the printer

Learning about the printer

Finding information about the printer

What are you looking for?

Initial setup instructions:

Connecting the printer

Installing the printer software

Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:

Selecting and storing paper and specialty media

Loading paper

Configuring printer settings

Viewing and printing documents and photos

Setting up and using the printer software

Configuring the printer on a network

Caring for and maintaining the printer

Troubleshooting and solving problems

Instructions for:

Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network

Troubleshooting printer connection problems

Find it here

Setup documentation—The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available on the Lexmark Web site at

http://support.lexmark.com

.

User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides are available on the Software and Documentation CD.

For updates, visit our Web site at

http://support.lexmark.com

.

Help using the printer software

Networking Guide—Open the Software and

Documentation CD, and then look for Printer and

Software Documentation under the Pubs folder. From the list of publications, click the Networking Guide link.

Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program or application, and then click Help.

Click

?

to view context

‑sensitive information.

Notes:

Help is automatically installed with the printer software.

The printer software is located in the printer program folder or on the desktop, depending on your operating system.

8

Learning about the printer

What are you looking for?

The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer support:

Documentation

Driver downloads

Live chat support

E

‑mail support

Voice support

Warranty information

Find it here

Lexmark Support Web site—

http://support.lexmark.com

Note: Select your country or region, and then select your product to view the appropriate support site.

Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the Support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your printer.

Record the following information (located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready when you contact customer support so that they may serve you faster:

Machine Type number

Serial number

Date purchased

Store where purchased

Warranty information varies by country or region:

In the US—See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer, or at

http://support.lexmark.com

.

In other countries and regions—See the printed warranty that came with your printer.

Selecting a location for the printer

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:

Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.

Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee

156 standard.

Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.

Keep the printer:

Clean, dry, and free of dust.

Away from stray staples and paper clips.

Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.

Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.

Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:

Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)

Storage temperature

‑40 to 60°C (-40 to 140°F)

Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:

9

Learning about the printer 10

1

Right side 30.48 cm (12 in.)

2

Front 50.8 cm (20 in.)

3

Left side 20.32 cm (8 in.)

4

Rear 20.32 cm (8 in.)

5

Top 54 cm (21 in.)

Printer configurations

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity tray and an input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see

www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters

.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.

You can configure your printer by adding one optional 250

‑ or 550‑sheet tray. For instructions on installing the optional

tray, see “Installing optional trays” on page 19.

Learning about the printer

1

Printer control panel

2

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

3

ADF tray

4

ADF bin

5

Front door release button

6

Standard 250

‑sheet tray

7

Optional 250

‑ or 550‑sheet tray

8

50

‑sheet multipurpose feeder

9

Paper stop

10

Standard bin

Understanding the basic functions of the scanner

Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs.

Send a fax using the printer control panel.

Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.

Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, or an FTP destination.

Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).

11

Learning about the printer

Using the ADF and scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

12

Use the ADF for multiple

‑page documents including two-sided (duplex) pages.

Use the scanner glass for single

‑page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Using the ADF

Load the document into the ADF tray faceup, short edge first.

Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray.

Scan sizes from 105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 inches) wide to 216 x 368 mm (8.5 x 14.5 inches) long.

Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m

2

(14–32 lb).

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Using the scanner glass

When using the scanner glass:

Place the document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.

Scan or copy documents up to 216 x 296.9 mm (8.5 x 11.69 inches).

Copy books up to 25.3 mm (1 inch) thick.

Learning about the printer

Using the printer control panel

1

2 3 4 5

6 7

13

13

10

9 8

12

11

Use the

1

Display

To

View the printer status and messages.

Set up and operate the printer.

Scroll up and down or left and right.

2

Arrow buttons

3

Select button

Select menu options.

Save settings.

4

Address book button View all the stored addresses.

5

Redial button View the last number dialed.

6

Keypad

7

Sleep button

Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.

Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.

Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode:

Press any hard button.

Open a door or cover.

Send a print job from the computer.

Perform a power

‑on reset using the main power switch.

Cancel all printer activity.

8

Cancel button

9

Start button

10

Fax button

Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.

Send faxes.

11

Back button

12

Home button

13

Indicator light

Return to the previous screen.

Go to the home screen.

Check the status of the printer.

Understanding the colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights

The colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition.

Learning about the printer

Indicator light color and its corresponding printer status

Indicator light

Off

Blinking green

Solid green

Blinking red

Printer status

The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.

The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.

The printer is on, but idle.

The printer requires user intervention.

Sleep button light color and its corresponding printer status

Sleep button light

Off

Solid amber

Blinking amber

Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes completely off for 1.9 seconds in pulsing pattern

Printer status

The printer is idle or in Ready state.

The printer is in Sleep mode.

The printer is waking from or entering Hibernate mode.

The printer is in Hibernate mode.

14

Additional printer setup

Additional printer setup

Installing internal options

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electircal outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Available internal options

Memory cards

Flash memory

Fonts

Accessing the controller board

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

1

Open the controller board access door.

15

Additional printer setup

2

Open the controller board shield using the green handle.

1

2

3

Use the following illustration to locate the option card connector.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.

Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.

16

4

Close the shield, and then the access door.

1 2

Additional printer setup

Installing an optional card

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.

Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controler board electronic components or connectors.

1

Access the controller board.

For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 15.

2

Unpack the optional card.

Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.

3

Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.

17

Additional printer setup

4

Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration.

18

Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the controller board.

Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller board.

5

Close the controller board shield, and then the controller board access door.

Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add

the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 23.

Additional printer setup 19

Installing hardware options

Order of installation

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor

‑mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high

‑capacity tray and an input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see

www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters

.

Install the printer and any hardware options you have purchased in the following order:

Printer stand

Optional 250

‑ or 550‑sheet tray

Printer

For more information on installing a printer stand, optional 250

‑ or 550‑sheet tray, or spacer, see the setup sheet that came with the option.

Installing optional trays

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity tray and an input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see

www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters

.

1

Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

Additional printer setup

2

Unpack the tray, and then remove all packing material.

3

Pull out the tray from the base.

1

2

20

4

Remove any packing material from inside the tray.

5

Insert the tray into the base.

6

Place the tray near the printer.

7

Align the printer with the tray, and then slowly lower the printer into place.

Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked.

Additional printer setup 21

8

Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

2

1

Notes:

When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the

options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 23.

To uninstall the optional trays, slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer until it clicks into place, and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the bottom.

Additional printer setup 22

Attaching cables

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.

Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or to the network using an Ethernet cable.

Make sure to match the following:

The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer

The appropriate Ethernet cable with the Ethernet port

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown while actively printing. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.

Use the

1

Printer power cord socket

2

Power switch

3

Ethernet port

4

EXT port

5

6

7

LINE port

USB printer port

Security slot

To

Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Turn the printer on or off.

Connect the printer to an Ethernet network.

Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer and the telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the printer and if this connection method is supported in your country or region.

Note: Remove the plug to access the port.

Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack (RJ

‑11), DSL filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to access the telephone line to send and receive faxes.

Connect the printer to a computer.

Attach a lock that will secure the printer in place.

Additional printer setup

Setting up the printer software

Installing the printer software

Note: If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall the current software first.

For Windows users

1

Close all open software programs.

2

Insert the Software and Documentation CD.

If the installation dialog does not appear after a minute, then launch the CD manually:

a

Click , or click Start and then click Run.

b

In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

c

Press Enter, or click OK.

3

Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

For Macintosh users

1

Close all open applications.

2

Insert the Software and Documentation CD.

If the installation dialog does not appear after a minute, then click the CD icon on the desktop.

3

Double-click the software installer package, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Note: To take advantage of the full features of your printer, select the custom install option, and then select all packages listed.

Using the Internet

1

Go to the Lexmark Web site at

http://support.lexmark.com

.

2

Navigate to:

SUPPORT & DOWNLOADS > select your printer > select your operating system

3

Download the printer driver, and then install the printer software.

Updating available options in the printer driver

When any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for use.

For Windows users

1

Open the printers folder.

a

Click , or click Start and then click Run.

b

In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.

23

Additional printer setup 24

c

Press Enter, or click OK.

2

Select the printer.

3

Right

‑click the printer, and then select Printer properties (Windows 7) or Properties (earlier versions).

4

Click the Configuration tab.

5

Do either of the following:

Click Update Now

Ask Printer.

Under Configuration Options, manually add any installed hardware options.

6

Click Apply.

For Macintosh users

1

From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:

System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver

System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver

2

Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.

Networking

Notes:

Purchase a MarkNet

TM

N8352 wireless network adapter first before setting up the printer on a wireless network.

For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the setup sheet that came with the adapter.

A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi

Protected Access (WPA), and WPA2 are types of security used on a network.

Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network

To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:

Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the printer.

A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network

The network gateway

The network mask

A nickname for the printer (optional)

Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.

You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a damaged cable.

Additional printer setup 25

Installing the printer on an Ethernet network

For Windows users

1

Insert the Software and Documentation CD.

If the installation dialog does not appear after a minute, then launch the CD manually:

a

Click , or click Start and then click Run.

b

In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of the CD or DVD drive.

c

Press Enter, or click OK.

2

Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

3

Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.

4

Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so.

5

Select the printer from the list, and then click Continue.

Note: If the configured printer does not appear in the list, then click Modify Search.

6

Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

For Macintosh users

1

Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.

2

Obtain the printer IP address either:

From the printer control panel

From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu

By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section

Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.

3

Install the printer driver on the computer.

a

Insert the Software and Documentation CD, and then double

‑click the installer package for the printer.

b

Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

c

Select a destination, and then click Continue.

d

From the Easy Install screen, click Install.

e

Type the user password, and then click OK.

All the necessary applications are installed on the computer.

f

Click Close when installation is complete.

4

Add the printer.

For IP printing:

a

From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:

System Preferences > Print & Scan

System Preferences > Print & Fax

b

Click +.

c

Click the IP tab.

d

Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.

Additional printer setup 26

For AppleTalk printing:

Notes:

Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.

This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.

a

From the Apple menu, navigate to:

System Preferences > Print & Fax

b

Click +, and then navigate to:

AppleTalk > select your printer > Add

Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network

Notes:

Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.

Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:

SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.

Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.

Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.

Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select.

Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:

WEP key

If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.

WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase

WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network.

802.1X–RADIUS

If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:

Authentication type

Inner authentication type

802.1X user name and password

Certificates

No security

If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.

Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.

Notes:

If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the

Additional printer setup 27 security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point, or contact your system support person.

To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your system support person.

Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard

Before you begin, make sure that:

A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.

Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:

> Settings > > Network/Ports > > Active NIC > > Auto >

Note: Make sure to turn off the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > > Network/Ports > > Network [x] > > Network [x] Setup >

Wireless Connection Setup >

2

Select a wireless connection setup.

Use To

Search for networks

Show available wireless connections.

Note: This menu item shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.

Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.

Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.

Wi

Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.

> Wireless > >

3

Press , and then follow the instructions on the printer display.

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)

Before you begin, make sure that:

The access point (wireless router) is WPS certified.

A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

Additional printer setup 28

Using the Push Button Configuration (PBC) method

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > >Network/Ports > > Network [x] >

Wi

Fi Protected Setup >

> Start Push Button Method >

2

Follow the instructions on the printer display.

> Network [x] Setup > > Wireless >

Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > >Network/Ports > > Network [x] > Wireless > > Wi

Fi Protected Setup >

>

Start PIN Method >

2

Copy the eight

‑digit WPS PIN.

3

Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address bar.

Notes:

The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

4

Access the WPS settings.

5

Enter the eight

‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.

>

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server

Before you begin, make sure that:

Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.

A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.

3

Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).

Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network mode, and channel.

4

Click Submit.

Additional printer setup 29

5

Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

6

To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x] section, see if the status is Connected.

Verifying printer setup

When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following:

Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly. Remove the option, and then install it again.

Network setup page—If your printer has networking support, then use this page to verify that the network connection is working. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

Printing a menu settings page

Print a menu settings page to view the current menu settings and to verify if the printer options are installed correctly.

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > Reports > > Menu Settings Page >

Note: If you have not changed any menu settings, then the menu settings page lists all the factory default settings.

Settings saved from the menus replace the factory default settings as user default settings. A user default setting remains in effect until you access the menu again, select another value, and save it.

Printing a network setup page

If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > Reports > > Network Setup Page >

Note: If an optional internal print server is installed, then Print Network [x] Setup Page appears.

2

Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.

If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.

Consult your system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.

Loading paper and specialty media 30

Loading paper and specialty media

The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,

see “Avoiding jams” on page 168 and “Storing paper” on page 49.

Setting the paper size and type

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > > Paper Menu > > Paper Size/Type >

2

Press the up or down arrow button to select the tray or feeder, and then press .

3

Press the up or down arrow button to select the paper size, and then press .

4

Press the up or down arrow button to select the paper type, and then press to change the settings.

Configuring Universal paper settings

The Universal paper size is a user

‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus.

Notes:

The smallest supported Universal paper size is 76.2 x 76.2 mm (3 x 3 inches), and is supported only from the multipurpose feeder.

The largest supported Universal paper size is 215.9 x 359.92 mm (8.5 x 14.17 inches), and is supported from all paper sources.

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > measure >

> Paper Menu > > Universal Setup > > Units of Measure > > select a unit of

2

Select Portrait Width or Portrait Height, and then press .

3

Press the left or right arrow button to change the setting, and then press .

Loading trays

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all trays closed until needed.

1

Pull out the tray completely.

Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the printer display. Doing so may cause a jam.

Loading paper and specialty media

2

Squeeze, and then slide the width guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.

1

2

A5

B5

EXEC

LTR

A4

31

Loading paper and specialty media

3

Unlock the length guide. Squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper you are loading.

32

1

2

3

A5

B5

EXEC

LTR

A4

Notes:

For some paper sizes like letter, legal, and A4, squeeze and slide the length guide tab backward to accommodate their length.

When loading legal

‑size paper, the length guide extends beyond the base leaving the paper exposed to dust.

To protect the paper from dust, you can purchase a dust cover separately. For more information, contact customer support.

If you are loading A6-size paper in the standard tray, then squeeze and then slide the length guide tab toward the center of the tray to the A6

‑size position.

Make sure the width and length guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray.

Loading paper and specialty media 33

A5

B5

EXEC

LTR

A4

4

Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

5

Load the paper stack.

Notes:

Load with the printable side facedown when using recycled or preprinted paper.

Load prepunched paper with the holes on the top edge toward the front of the tray.

Loading paper and specialty media

Load letterhead facedown, with the top edge of the sheet toward the front of the tray. For two

‑sided printing, load letterhead faceup with the bottom edge of the sheet toward the front of the tray.

Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the width guide.

34

6

Insert the tray.

7

From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.

Loading paper and specialty media 35

Loading the multipurpose feeder

Use the multipurpose feeder when printing on different paper sizes and types or specialty media, such as card stock, transparencies, paper labels, and envelopes. You can also use it for single

‑page print jobs on letterhead.

1

Open the multipurpose feeder.

a

Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.

Loading paper and specialty media

b

Pull the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.

36

2

Squeeze the tab on the left width guide, and then move the guides for the paper you are loading.

1

2

3

Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.

Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Hold transparencies by the edges. Flex the stack of transparencies back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.

Loading paper and specialty media 37

Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

4

Load the paper or specialty media.

Notes:

Do not force paper or specialty media into the multipurpose feeder.

Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the paper guides. Overfilling may cause paper jams.

Load paper, transparencies, and card stock with the recommended printable side faceup and the top edge entering the printer first. For more information on loading transparencies, see the packaging that the transparencies came in.

Loading paper and specialty media

Note: When loading A6

‑size paper, make sure the multipurpose feeder extender rests lightly against the edge of the paper so that the last few sheets of paper remain in place.

38

Load letterhead faceup with the top edge entering the printer first. For two

‑sided (duplex) printing, load letterhead facedown with the bottom edge entering the printer first.

Loading paper and specialty media

Load envelopes with the flap on the left side facedown.

39

Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or self

‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.

5

From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper or specialty media loaded in the multipurpose feeder.

Linking and unlinking trays

When one linked tray becomes empty, paper feeds from the next linked tray. We recommended giving all custom paper, such as letterhead and different colored plain papers, a different custom type name so that the trays they are in do not automatically link.

Linking and unlinking trays

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Paper Menu.

3

Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.

To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.

To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.

4

Click Submit.

Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information,

see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 30.

Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.

The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are not properly configured.

Loading paper and specialty media 40

Creating a custom name for a paper type

Using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.

3

Select a custom name, and then type a new custom paper type name.

4

Click Submit.

5

Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.

Using the printer control panel

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > > Paper Menu > > Custom Names

2

Select a custom name, and then type a new custom paper type name.

3

Press .

4

Press Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.

Assigning a custom paper type name

Using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.

3

Type a name for the paper type, and then click Submit.

4

Select a custom type, and then verify that the correct paper type is associated with the custom name.

Note: Plain Paper is the factory default paper type for all user

‑defined custom names.

Loading paper and specialty media 41

Using the printer control panel

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > > Paper Menu > > Custom Names

2

Type a name for the paper type, and then press .

Assigning a custom paper type

Using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.

3

Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.

Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user

‑defined custom names.

4

Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > > Paper Menu > > Custom Types

2

Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.

Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user

‑defined custom names.

3

Press .

Paper and specialty media guide 42

Paper and specialty media guide

Additional information for printing on speciality media may be found in the Card Stock and Label Guide available at

http://support.lexmark.com

.

Paper guidelines

Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample of the paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.

Paper characteristics

The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock.

Weight

The standard printer trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 90

‑g/m

2

(24

‑lb) bond grain long paper. The optional trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 120

‑g/m

2

(32

‑lb) bond grain long paper. The multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights up to 163

‑g/m

2

(43

‑lb) bond grain long paper. Paper lighter than

60 g/m

2

(16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75

‑g/m

2

(20

‑lb) bond grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches), it is recommended to use 90 g/m

2

(24 lb) or heavier paper.

Note: Two

‑sided printing is supported only for 60–90‑g/m

2

(16–24

‑lb) bond paper.

Curl

Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems.

Smoothness

Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points; smoothness between 150–250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.

Moisture content

The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.

Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.

Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24–48 hours before printing. Extend the time to several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.

Paper and specialty media guide 43

Grain direction

Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.

For 60–90

‑g/m

2

(16–24

‑lb) bond paper, grain long paper is recommended.

Fiber content

Most high

‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.

Unacceptable paper

The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:

Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper

Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer

Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser

Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) less than ±2.5 mm (±0.10 inch), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms

In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms:

Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers

Rough

‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers

Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)

Paper weighing less than 60 g/m

2

(16 lb)

Multiple

‑part forms or documents

Selecting paper

Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble

‑free printing.

To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:

Always use new, undamaged paper.

Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.

Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.

Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.

Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead

Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:

Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m

2

(16 to 24 lb) weight paper.

Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.

Paper and specialty media guide 44

Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.

Use papers printed with heat

‑resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation

‑set or oil‑based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.

When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.

Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.

Using recycled paper and other office papers

As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government a study demonstrating that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper. However, no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.

Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of test paper from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions. Lexmark has found no reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following property guidelines apply to recycled paper.

Low moisture content (4–5%)

Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)

Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and much rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.

Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)

Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed

Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m

2

[16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing conditions).

Paper and specialty media guide 45

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights

For information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide.

Supported paper sizes

Paper size and dimension Standard

250

sheet tray

Business card X

3 x 5 in.

X

Optional 250

or

550

sheet tray

X

Multipurpose feeder

X

X

ADF

X

X

Scanner glass

Duplex mode

X

X

4 x 6 in.

X X X X

A4

210 x 297 mm

(8.27 x 11.7 in.)

A5

148 x 210 mm

(5.83 x 8.27 in.)

A6

105 x 148 mm

(4.13 x 5.83 in.)

JIS B5

182 x 257 mm

(7.17 x 10.1 in.)

Letter

215.9 x 279.4 mm

(8.5 x 11 in.)

X

X

X

X

Legal

215.9 x 355.6 mm

(8.5 x 14 in.)

Executive

184.2 x 266.7 mm

(7.25 x 10.5 in.)

X

Oficio (México)

215.9 x 340.4 mm

(8.5 x 13.4 in.)

X

Folio

215.9 x 330.2 mm

(8.5 x 13 in.)

X

*

To support two

‑sided (duplex) printing, the Universal width must be between 76.2 mm (3 in.) and 215.9 mm (8.5 in.); the

Universal length must be between 76.2 mm (3 in.) and 359.92 mm (14.17 in.).

Paper and specialty media guide 46

Paper size and dimension Standard

250

sheet tray

Statement

139.7 x 215.9 mm

(5.5 x 8.5 in.)

Universal

*

76.2 x 76.2 mm to

215.9 x 359.92 mm

(3 x 3 in. to 8.5 x 14.17 in.)

7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch)

98.4 x 190.5 mm

(3.875 x 7.5 in.)

X

Optional 250

550

X

or

sheet tray

Multipurpose feeder

ADF

X

Scanner glass

X

Duplex mode

X

X

9 Envelope

98.4 x 226.1 mm

(3.875 x 8.9 in.)

10 Envelope

104.8 x 241.3 mm

(4.12 x 9.5 in.)

DL Envelope

110 x 220 mm

(4.33 x 8.66 in.)

C5 Envelope

162 x 229 mm

(6.38 x 9.01 in.)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

B5 Envelope

176 x 250 mm

(6.93 x 9.84 in.)

X X X X X

Other Envelope

85.7 x 165 mm to

215.9 x 355.6 mm

(3.375 x 6.50 in. to

8.5 x 14 in.)

X X X X X

*

To support two

‑sided (duplex) printing, the Universal width must be between 76.2 mm (3 in.) and 215.9 mm (8.5 in.); the

Universal length must be between 76.2 mm (3 in.) and 359.92 mm (14.17 in.).

Supported paper types and weights

The standard tray supports 60–90

‑g/m

2

(16–24

‑lb) paper weights. The optional tray supports 60–120‑g/m

2

(16–32

‑lb) paper weights. The multipurpose feeder supports 60–163

‑g/m

2

(16–43

‑lb) paper weights.

Paper and specialty media guide

Paper type 250

or

550

sheet tray

Multipurpose feeder Duplex mode ADF Scanner glass

Plain paper

Card stock

Transparencies

Recycled

Paper labels

2

Bond

Envelope

3

Rough envelope

Letterhead

Preprinted

X

X

X

1

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Colored paper

Light paper

Heavy paper

Rough/Cotton X

Custom Type [x]

1

Transparencies are supported only in 250

‑sheet tray.

2

One

‑sided paper labels designed for laser printers are supported for occasional use. We recommend printing only up to

20 pages of paper labels per month. Vinyl, pharmacy, and two

‑sided labels are not supported.

3

Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed on a table facedown.

Using specialty media

Tips on using letterhead

Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.

Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.

Before loading letterhead, flex, fan, and straighten the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.

Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. For information on how to load letterhead, see:

“Loading trays” on page 30

“Loading the multipurpose feeder” on page 35

47

Paper and specialty media guide 48

Tips on using transparencies

Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.

Feed transparencies from the standard tray, or the multipurpose feeder.

Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures up to 185°C (365°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.

Note: If the transparency weight is set to Heavy and the transparency texture is set to Rough in the Paper menu, then transparencies can be printed at a temperature up to 195°C (383°F).

Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.

Before loading transparencies, flex, fan, and straighten the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.

Tips on using envelopes

Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.

Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or releasing hazardous emissions.

For best performance, use envelopes made from 90

‑g/m

2

(24

‑lb bond) paper or 25% cotton. All‑cotton envelopes must not exceed 70

‑g/m

2

(20

‑lb bond) weight.

Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.

To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:

Have excessive curl or twist

Are stuck together or damaged in any way

Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing

Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars

Have an interlocking design

Have postage stamps attached

Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position

Have bent corners

Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes

Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.

Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.

Tips on using labels

Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.

Note: Use only paper label sheets. Vinyl, pharmacy, and two

‑sided labels are not supported.

For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available at

http://support.lexmark.com

.

Paper and specialty media guide 49

When printing on labels:

Use labels designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:

The labels can withstand temperatures up to 240°C (464°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.

Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25

‑psi (172‑kPa) pressure without delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.

Do not use labels with slick backing material.

Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner cartridge warranties.

Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.

Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inch) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die

‑cuts of the label.

Make sure the adhesive backing does not reach to the edge of the sheet. Zone coating of the adhesive should be at least 1 mm (0.04 inch) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.

If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, then remove a 2

‑mm (0.06‑inch) strip on the leading and driver edge, and then use a non

‑oozing adhesive.

Portrait orientation is recommended, especially when printing bar codes.

Tips on using card stock

Card stock is heavy, single

‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness, and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.

When printing on card stock:

Make sure the Paper Type is Card Stock.

Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.

Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper handling problems.

Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 240°C

(464°F) without releasing hazardous emissions.

Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting introduces semi

‑liquid and volatile components into the printer.

Use grain short card stock when possible.

Storing paper

Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:

For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity between 40 and 60 percent.

Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.

Store individual packages on a flat surface.

Paper and specialty media guide 50

Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.

Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.

Printing

Printing

Printing a document

Printing a document

1

From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.

2

Send the print job:

For Windows users a

With a document open, click File > Print.

b

Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.

c

Adjust the settings, if necessary.

d

Click OK > Print.

For Macintosh users a

Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog if necessary:

1

With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.

2

Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.

3

Click OK.

b

Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog if necessary:

1

With a document open, choose File > Print.

If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2

From the Print dialog and pop

‑up menus adjust the settings if necessary.

Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.

3

Click Print.

Adjusting toner darkness

Using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of the printer in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.

3

Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit.

51

Printing 52

Using the printer control panel

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > > Print Settings > > Quality Menu >

2

Adjust the toner darkness, and then press .

> Toner Darkness

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Storing print jobs in the printer

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > > Security > > Confidential Print > select the print job type

Print job type

Max Invalid PIN

Confidential Job Expiration

Repeat Job Expiration

Verify Job Expiration

Reserve Job Expiration

Description

Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.

Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.

Lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel.

Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the numbers 0–9.

Lets you print and store print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting.

Lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed.

Lets you store print jobs for printing at a later time. The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.

Notes:

Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs.

You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel.

All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.

2

Press .

Printing 53

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you choose to delete them.

For Windows users

1

With a document open, click File > Print.

2

Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.

3

Click Print and Hold.

4

Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four

‑digit PIN.

5

Click OK or Print.

6

From the printer control panel, release the print job.

For confidential print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

For other print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

For Macintosh users

1

With a document open, choose File > Print.

If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2

From the print options or Copies & Pages pop

‑up menu, choose Job Routing.

3

Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four

‑digit PIN.

4

Click OK or Print.

5

From the printer control panel, release the print job:

For confidential print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

For other print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print

Modifying confidential print settings

Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Printing 54

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Configuration > Other Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.

3

Modify the settings:

Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds a specific number of PIN entry attempts, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.

Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within the specified time, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.

4

Save the modified settings.

Printing information pages

Printing a font sample list

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > > Reports > > Print Fonts

2

Press the up or down arrow button to select the font setting.

3

Press .

Note: The PPDS fonts appear only when the PPDS data stream is activated.

Canceling a print job

Canceling a print job from the printer control panel

From the printer control panel, press . When a list of print jobs appears, select the job to cancel, and then press .

Canceling a print job from the computer

For Windows users

1

Open the printers folder.

a

Click , or click Start and then click Run.

b

In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.

c

Press Enter, or click OK.

2

Double

‑click the printer icon.

Printing

3

Select the print job you want to cancel.

4

Click Delete.

For Macintosh users

1

From the Apple Menu, navigate to either of the following:

System Preferences > Print & Scan > select a printer > Open Print Queue

System Preferences > Print & Fax > select a printer > Open Print Queue

2

From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel, and then click Delete.

55

Copying

Copying

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

Use the ADF for multiple

‑page documents including two-sided (duplex) pages.

Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Making copies

Making a quick copy

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy paper are the same.

3

From the printer control panel, press .

Copying using the ADF

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

56

Copying 57

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

Adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, use the keypad to enter the number of copies, and then press .

Copying using the scanner glass

1

Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

2

From the printer control panel, use the keypad to enter the number of copies, and then press .

Note: If you want to scan another document, then place the next document on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press .

3

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press .

Copying photos

1

Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

2

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Copy > > Content Type > Photo

3

From the Content Source menu, choose a setting that best describes the original photo your are copying, and then press .

Note: If you want to copy another photo, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press .

4

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press .

Copying on specialty media

Copying on transparencies

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

Copying 58

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Copy >

4

Navigate to:

> Copy from > select the size of the original document

Copy to > > select the tray containing the transparencies > > select the number of copies or enter a number on the keypad >

5

If there are no trays that contain transparencies, then do the following:

a

Navigate to:

Copy to > > Manual Feeder > > select the size of the transparencies > > Transparency >

b

Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder, and then press .

Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press .

6

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press .

Copying on letterhead

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Copy >

4

Navigate to:

> Copy from > select the size of the original document

Copy to > > select the tray containing the letterhead > on the keypad >

> select the number of copies or enter a number

Copying

5

If there are no trays that contain letterhead, then do the following:

a

Navigate to:

Copy to > > Manual Feeder > > select the size of the letterhead > Letterhead

b

Place the letterhead faceup, top edge first into the multipurpose feeder, and then press .

Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press .

6

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press .

Customizing copy settings

Copying to a different size

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Copy >

4

Navigate to:

Copy to >

> Copy from > select the size of the original document

> select a new size for the copy > select the number of copies or enter a number on the keypad >

Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press .

5

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press .

Making copies using paper from a selected tray

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

59

Copying 60

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Copy >

4

Navigate to:

> Copy from > select the size of the original document

Copy to > > select the tray containing the paper size and type you want to use > > select the number of copies or enter a number on the keypad >

5

If there are no trays that contain the paper size and type you want to use, then do the following:

a

Navigate to:

Copy to > > Manual Feeder > > select the paper size > > select the paper type >

b

Load the size and type of paper into the multipurpose feeder, and then press .

Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press .

6

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press .

Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)

1

Load a document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Copy > > Sides (Duplex) > select a duplex option > select the number of copies or enter a number on the keypad >

Notes:

The first number refers to the original document. The second number refers to the copy. For example, select

2-sided to 2-sided if you have two-sided original documents and you want two

‑sided copies.

If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press .

4

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press .

Copying 61

Reducing or enlarging copies

Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Copy > > Scale > adjust the scale setting > select the number of copies or enter a number on the keypad >

Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press .

4

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press .

Making a copy lighter or darker

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Copy > > Darkness > adjust the darkness setting > select the number of copies or enter a number on the keypad >

Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press .

4

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press .

Adjusting copy quality

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Copying 62

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Copy > > Content Type > select the content type of the original document

4

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to one of the following:

Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.

Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text and graphics or photos.

Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.

Graphics—The original document is mostly business

‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.

5

Press the up or down arrow button until Content Source appears, and then press the left or right arrow button to scroll to one of the following:

Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.

Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.

Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.

Press—The original document is from an offset press.

Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.

Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.

Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.

Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

6

Select the number of copies or enter a number on the keypad, and then press .

Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press .

7

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press .

Collating copies

If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the copies as groups of pages (not collated).

Collated Not collated

Copying 63

To select a Collate setting:

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Copy > > Collate > select the collate setting you want > select the number of copies or enter a number on the keypad >

Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press .

4

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press .

Placing separator sheets between copies

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Copy > > Separator Sheets

4

Select Between Copies, Between Jobs, Between Pages, or Off.

5

Select the number of copies or enter a number on the keypad, and then press .

Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press .

6

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press .

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet

To save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple

‑page document onto a single sheet of paper.

Copying

Notes:

Make sure the paper size is set to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.

The copy size must be set to 100%.

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Copy > > Paper Saver > select the setting that you want

4

Select Off, 2

up Portrait, 2up Landscape, 4up Portrait, or 4up Landscape.

5

Select the number of copies or enter a number on the keypad, and then press .

Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press .

6

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press .

Placing information on copies

Placing an overlay message on each page

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Copy > > Overlay > select an overlay message you want

4

Select Off, Confidential, Copy, Draft, Urgent, or Custom.

64

Copying 65

5

Select the number of copies or enter a number on the keypad, and then press .

Note: If you want to copy another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press .

6

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press .

Canceling a copy job

Canceling a copy job from the printer control panel

From the printer control panel, press .

Understanding the copy options

Copies

This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.

Copy from

This option opens a screen where you can select the paper size of the original document.

To scroll to the paper size that matches the original document, press the left or right arrow button, and then press

.

To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Mixed Sizes, and then press .

To set the printer to automatically detect the size of the original document, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Auto Size Sense, and then press .

Copy to

This option lets you select the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.

To scroll to the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder, press the left or right arrow button, and then press .

If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference.

Copying 66

If the paper type or size you want to use is not loaded in one of the trays, then press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Manual Feeder, press feeder.

, and then manually load the paper in the manual feeder or multipurpose

To match each copy to the paper size of the original document, set “Copy to” to Auto Size Match. If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a tray, manual feeder, or multipurpose feeder.

Scale

This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set automatic scaling.

When copying to a different paper size, such as from legal

‑size to letter‑size paper, set the “Copy from” and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.

To decrease or increase the value by 1%, press the left or right arrow button on the printer control panel. To make a continuous decrease or increase in value, press and hold the button for two or more seconds.

Darkness

This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.

Sides (Duplex)

This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.

Collate

This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.

Content Type

This option lets you set the original document type.

Select from the following content types:

Graphics—The original document is mostly business

‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.

Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.

Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.

Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.

Content Source

This option lets you set the original document source.

Select from the following content sources:

Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.

Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.

Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.

Copying 67

Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.

Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.

Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.

Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.

Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

Advanced Duplex

This option lets you specify the document orientation, whether documents are one-sided or two-sided, and how documents are bound.

Overlay

This option lets you create a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose from

Confidential, Copy, Draft, Urgent, and Custom. You can type a custom message in the ”Enter the Custom Text Overlay and press OK” field. The message will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.

Separator Sheets

This option lets you place a blank sheet of paper between copies, prints, pages, print jobs or copy jobs. The separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.

Paper Saver

This option lets you print two or more pages of an original document on the same page. Paper Saver is also called N-

up printing where N stands for the number of pages. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page.

E-mailing

E-mailing

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

68

Use the ADF for multiple

‑page documents including two-sided (duplex) pages.

Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

You can use the printer to e

‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e‑mail from the printer. You can type the e

‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.

Setting up the printer to e-mail

Setting up the e-mail function

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.

3

Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.

Configuring e

mail settings

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

E-mailing 69

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.

3

Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.

Creating an e-mail shortcut

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.

3

Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the e-mail address.

Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).

4

Adjust the scan settings, if necessary.

5

Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.

If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

E-mailing a document

Sending an e

mail using a shortcut number

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

Press #, then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then press .

4

Press .

Sending an e

mail using the address book

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

E-mailing

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is properly loaded.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> E-mail Shortcuts > > select the name of the recipient >

Canceling an e-mail

From the printer control panel, press .

70

Faxing

Faxing

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

Use the ADF for multiple

‑page documents including two-sided (duplex) pages.

Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Setting up the printer to fax

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.

Notes:

The following connection methods are applicable only in select countries or regions.

During the initial printer setup, clear the fax function check box and any other function you plan to set up later, and then press Continue.

The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax.

71

Faxing 72

Initial fax setup

Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business, other entity, or individual).

To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web

Server, and then open the Settings menu.

Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup information.

Using the printer control panel for fax setup

When the printer is turned on for the first time, a series of start

‑up screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities, then the Fax Name or Station Name and Fax Number or Station Number screens appear:

1

When Fax Name or Station Name appears, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes, and then press

.

2

When Fax Number or Station Number appears, enter the printer fax number, and then press .

Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.

3

In the Fax Settings menu, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes in the Fax Name or Station Name field.

4

In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.

5

Click Submit.

Faxing

Choosing a fax connection

Scenario 1: Standard telephone line

Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line

73

To connect:

1

Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.

2

Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.

Tips for this setup:

You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer Off).

If you want to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings that you want.

Faxing

Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine

Connected to the same telephone wall jack

74

PHONE

LINE

To connect:

1

Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.

2

Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.

3

Connect the answering machine to the port of the printer.

Faxing

Connected to different wall jacks

75

PHONE LINE

To connect:

1

Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.

2

Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.

Tips for this setup:

If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes automatically

(Auto Answer On).

Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering machine picks up calls after four rings, then set the printer to pick up after six rings. This way, the answering machine picks up calls first and your voice calls are received. If the call is a fax, then the printer detects the fax signal on the line and takes over the call.

If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes automatically.

Faxing

Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service

76

02

To connect:

1

Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.

2

Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.

3

Connect the telephone to the port of the printer.

Tips for this setup:

This setup works best if you subscribe to a distinctive ring service. If you have distinctive ring service, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes automatically.

If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes manually

(Auto Answer Off).

When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the telephone to receive the fax.

You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), but you need to turn off the voice mail service when you are expecting a fax. This setting works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax.

Faxing

Scenario 2: Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)

77

A Digital Subscriber Line splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone and fax signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel. This way, you can use the same line for analog voice calls (including faxes) and digital Internet access.

To minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection, you need to install a DSL filter for the analog devices (fax machine, telephone, answering machine) in your network. Interference causes noise and static on the telephone, failed and poor quality faxes for the printer, and slow Internet connection on your computer.

To install a filter for the printer:

1

Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.

2

Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer. Connect the other end to the phone port on the DSL filter.

3

To continue using a computer for Internet access, connect the computer to the DSL HPN port on the DSL filter.

4

To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the port of the printer, and then connect the telephone to the port.

Faxing

Scenario 3: VoIP telephone service

78

To connect:

1

Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.

2

Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.

Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost for activation of the second phone port.

3

Connect the telephone to the port of the printer.

Tips for this setup:

To make sure that the phone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the phone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.

If you need two phone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the printer into the second phone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the port labeled Phone Line

1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.

Note: Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.

Faxing

Scenario 4: Digital telephone service through a cable provider

Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem

79

1

Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.

2

Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.

Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost for activation of the second phone port.

3

Connect your analog telephone phone to the port of the printer.

Notes:

To make sure that the telephone port on the cable modem is active, plug an analog telephone into the telephone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.

If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the printer into the second telephone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line

1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.

Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.

Faxing

Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility

80

1

Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.

2

Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

3

Connect your analog telephone to the port of the printer.

Scenario 5: Countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs

Some countries or regions may have different types of telephone wall jack connectors than those that came with the printer. The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ-11. Your printer comes with the RJ-11 jack and a telephone cable with the RJ-11 plug.

Faxing

If the wall jack or equipment in your facility is not compatible with this type of connection, then you need to use a telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or region may not come with your printer, and you may need to purchase it separately.

81

There may be an adapter plug installed in the port of the printer. If you are using a telephone adapter or a facility that has a cascaded or serial wiring scheme, then do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer.

Part name

Lexmark adapter plug

Part number

40X8519

Faxing

Connecting the printer to a non

RJ11 wall jack

82

LINE

EXT

1

Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with printer to the port of the printer.

2

Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ

‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.

3

If you want to connect another device (telephone or answering machine) to the same wall jack, and if the device has a non

‑RJ‑11 connector, then connect it directly to the telephone adapter.

Notes:

The port of the printer may have an adapter plug for use with the adapter. Do not remove the plug from the port of the printer.

In some countries or regions, the printer may not come with a telephone adapter or an adapter plug.

Faxing 83

Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany

The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering machines. The

F port is for telephones.

N F N

Connect the printer to any of the N ports.

N F N

PHONE

LINE

Faxing 84

1

Connect one end of the telephone cable that came the printer to the port of the printer.

2

Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ

‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.

3

If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices as shown.

Note: Do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded telephone system.

Connecting to a distinctive ring service

A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:

1

Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .

2

Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

3

Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want the printer to answer.

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > > Fax Settings > > Distinctive Rings > select the ring tone you want >

Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.

3

From the Fax Settings menu, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes in the Fax Name or Station Name field.

4

In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.

5

Click Submit.

Faxing 85

Setting the date and time

You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, then you may have to reset the date and time.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Other Settings area > Security > Set Date and Time.

3

In the Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.

4

Click Submit.

Note: We recommend using the network time.

Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time

Set the printer to automatically adjust for daylight saving time.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Security > Set Date and Time.

3

Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time

Zone Setup section.

4

Click Submit.

Sending a fax

Sending a fax using the printer control panel

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

Faxing 86

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Fax > > enter a fax or shortcut number on the keypad > > Original Size >

Note: If you want to fax another document, then place it on the scanner glass, press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Scan the Next Page, and then press .

4

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to Finish the Job, and then press .

Sending a fax using the computer

The printer driver fax option lets you send a print job to the printer, which sends the job as a fax. The fax option works as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel.

1

With a document open, click File > Print.

2

Select the printer, and then navigate to:

Properties > Fax tab > Enable fax

3

Enter the recipient fax number or numbers in the “Fax number(s)” field.

Note: Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature

4

If necessary, enter a prefix in the “Dialing prefix” field.

5

Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.

6

If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and then enter the appropriate information.

7

Click OK.

Notes:

The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on installing these drivers, see the Software and Documentation CD.

The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under the Configuration tab before it can be used.

If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you are prompted to verify the recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is cleared, then the queued document is sent automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.

Sending a fax using a shortcut number

Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. A shortcut number (1–999) can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Faxing

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

Press # , and then enter the shortcut number on the keypad.

4

Press .

Sending a fax using the address book

The address book feature lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers.

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Fax > > > select the name of the recipient >

Sending a fax at a scheduled time

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly into the ADF tray.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Fax > sent >

> enter the fax number > Delayed Send > Send Later > select the date you want the fax to be

> select the time you want the fax to be sent >

4

Press .

Note: The document is scanned, and then faxed at the scheduled time.

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web

Server

Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

87

Faxing 88

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.

Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support person.

3

Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.

Notes:

To create a multiple

‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.

Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).

4

Assign a shortcut number.

Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

5

Click Add.

Customizing fax settings

Changing the fax resolution

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Fax > > enter the fax number > Resolution > select the resolution you want

Note: You can choose from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (slowest speed and best quality).

4

Press .

Making a fax lighter or darker

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Faxing 89

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Fax > > enter the fax number > > Darkness > adjust the darkness of the fax >

Viewing a fax log

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Reports.

3

Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.

Blocking junk faxes

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.

Notes:

This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax name.

In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax names of specific fax callers you want to block.

Canceling an outgoing fax

Canceling a fax job while the original documents are still scanning

If you are using the ADF tray and Scanning page appears, then press .

If you are using the scanner glass and Scanning page, Scan the Next Page, or Finish the Job appears, then press .

Faxing 90

Canceling a fax job after scanning the original documents

1

From the printer control panel, press .

2

Press the left or right arrow button to scroll to the job you want to cancel.

3

Press > Delete Selected Jobs.

Holding and forwarding faxes

Holding faxes

This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.

3

From the Held Fax Mode menu, select Off, Always On, Manual, or Scheduled.

4

If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:

a

Click Fax Holding Schedule.

b

From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.

c

From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.

d

From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.

5

Click Add.

Forwarding a fax

This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e

‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Fax Settings.

3

From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.

4

From the “Forward to” menu, select Fax, E

mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.

Faxing 91

5

In the “Forward to Shortcut” field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.

Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.

6

Click Submit.

Understanding the fax options

Original Size

This option lets you choose the size of the documents you are going to fax.

1

From the Fax area of the printer control panel, press the Options button.

Original Size

appears.

2

Press .

3

Press the arrow buttons until the size of the original document appears, and then press .

Resolution

This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.

Select one of the following:

Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.

Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.

Super fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.

Ultra fine 600 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.

Darkness

This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.

Content Type

This option lets you set the original document type.

Select from the following content types:

Graphics—The original document is mostly business

‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.

Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.

Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.

Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.

Faxing 92

Content Source

This option lets you set the original document source.

Select from the following content sources:

Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.

Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.

Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.

Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.

Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.

Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.

Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.

Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

Sides (Duplex)

This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.

Note: Duplex scanning is not available on selected printer models.

Orientation

This option lets you specify the orientation of the original document, and then change the Sides and Binding settings to match the orientation.

Binding

This option lets you specify if the original document is bound on the long

‑edge or short‑edge side.

Scanning

Scanning

Scanning to an FTP address

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

Use the ADF for multiple

‑page documents including two-sided (duplex) pages.

Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be sent to the server at a time.

When an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be another PostScript printer.

Creating shortcuts

Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Navigate to:

Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup

3

Enter the appropriate information.

Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support person.

93

Scanning

4

Enter a shortcut number.

If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

5

Click Add.

Scanning to an FTP address

Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, press #, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.

4

Press .

Scanning to an FTP address using the address book

1

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is properly loaded.

2

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

3

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> FTP Shortcuts > > select the name of the recipient >

94

Scanning

Scanning to a computer

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

95

Use the ADF for multiple

‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer. The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.

Scanning to a computer

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Scan Profile > Create Scan Profile.

3

Select your scan settings, and then click Next.

4

Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.

5

Type a scan name.

The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.

6

Click Submit.

7

Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.

A shortcut number is automatically assigned when you click Submit. You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents.

a

Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.

Scanning 96

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light turns on when the paper is loaded properly.

b

If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.

c

From the printer control panel, press #, and then type the shortcut number using the keypad, or press the up or down arrow button to scroll to Held Jobs, and then press the up or down arrow button to scroll to Profiles.

After entering the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program you specified. If you selected Profiles on the printer control panel, then locate your shortcut on the list.

8

View the file from the computer.

The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.

Understanding printer menus

Understanding printer menus

Menus list

Paper Menu

Default Source

Paper Size/Type

Configure MP

Substitute Size

Paper Texture

Paper Weight

Paper Loading

Custom Types

Custom Scan Sizes

Universal Setup

Reports

Menu Settings Page

Device Statistics

Network Setup Page

1

Shortcut List

Fax Job Log

Fax Call Log

Copy Shortcuts

E-mail Shortcuts

Fax Shortcuts

FTP Shortcuts

Profiles List

Print Fonts

Asset Report

Network/Ports

Active NIC

Standard Network

2

SMTP Setup

Security

Confidential Print

Security Audit Log

Set Date and Time

Help

Print All Guides

Copy Guide

E-mail Guide

Fax Guide

FTP Guide

Print Defects Guide

Information Guide

Supplies Guide

Manage Shortcuts

Fax Shortcuts

E-mail Shortcuts

FTP Shortcuts

Copy Shortcuts

Profile Shortcuts

1

Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Network Setup Page or Network [x] Setup Page.

2

Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network [x].

Settings

General Settings

Copy Settings

Fax Settings

E

‑mail Settings

FTP Settings

Print Settings

97

Understanding printer menus

Paper menu

Default Source menu

Use

Default Source

Tray [x]

MP Feeder

Manual Paper

Manual Envelope

To

Set a default paper source for all print jobs.

Notes:

Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.

From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.

If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the paper size and paper type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.

Paper Size/Type menu

Use

Tray [x] Size

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5

Letter

Legal

Executive

Oficio (Mexico)

Folio

Statement

Universal

To

Specify the size of the paper loaded in each tray.

Notes:

Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.

If the same size and type of paper are loaded in two trays and the tray settings for paper size and type match, then the trays are automatically linked. The multipurpose feeder may also be linked. When one tray is

empty, the job prints using paper from the linked tray.

A6 is supported only in Tray 1 and in the multipurpose feeder.

Tray [x] Type

Plain Paper

Transparency

Recycled

Labels

Bond

Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored Paper

Light Paper

Heavy Paper

Rough/Cotton

Custom Type [x]

Specify the type of the paper loaded in each tray.

Notes:

Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting for all other trays.

If available, a user

‑defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].

Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.

Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

98

Understanding printer menus

Use

MP Feeder Size

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5

Letter

Legal

Executive

Oficio (Mexico)

Folio

Statement

Universal

7 3/4 Envelope

9 Envelope

10 Envelope

DL Envelope

C5 Envelope

B5 Envelope

Other Envelope

To

Specify the size of the paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.

Notes:

Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory

default setting.

From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP Feeder

Size to appear as a menu item.

The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size. The paper size value must be set.

MP Feeder Type

Plain Paper

Card Stock

Transparency

Recycled

Labels

Bond

Envelope

Rough Envelope

Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored Paper

Light Paper

Heavy Paper

Rough/Cotton

Custom Type [x]

Specify the type of the paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.

Notes:

Plain Paper is the factory default setting.

From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” in order for MP

Feeder Type to appear as a menu item.

Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

99

Understanding printer menus 100

Use

Manual Paper Size

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5

Letter

Legal

Executive

Oficio (Mexico)

Folio

Statement

Universal

Manual Paper Type

Plain Paper

Card Stock

Transparency

Recycled

Labels

Bond

Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored Paper

Light Paper

Heavy Paper

Rough/Cotton

Custom Type [x]

Manual Envelope Size

7 3/4 Envelope

9 Envelope

10 Envelope

DL Envelope

C5 Envelope

B5 Envelope

Other Envelope

To

Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.

Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.

Specify the type of the paper being manually loaded.

Notes:

Plain Paper is the factory default setting.

From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Manual” in order for

Manual Paper Type to appear as a menu item.

Specify the size of the envelope being manually loaded.

Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the international factory default setting.

Manual Envelope Type

Envelope

Rough Envelope

Custom Type [x]

Specify the type of the envelope being manually loaded.

Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.

Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Understanding printer menus

Configure MP menu

Use

Configure MP

Cassette

Manual

First

To

Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.

Notes:

Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.

Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual

‑feed print jobs.

First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.

Substitute Size menu

Use

Substitute Size

Off

Statement/A5

Letter/A4

All Listed

To

Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.

Notes:

All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are allowed.

Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.

Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change

Paper

appearing.

Paper Texture menu

Use

Plain Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Card Stock Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Transparency Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Recycled Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

To

Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded.

Notes:

Normal is the factory default setting.

The options appear only if card stock is supported.

Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

101

Understanding printer menus

Use

Labels Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Bond Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Envelope Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Rough Envelope Texture

Rough

Letterhead Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Preprinted Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Colored Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Light Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Heavy Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

Rough/Cotton Texture

Rough

Custom [x] Texture

Smooth

Normal

Rough

To

Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded.

Note: Rough is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded.

Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded.

Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded.

Notes:

Normal is the factory default setting.

The options appear only if the custom type is supported.

102

Understanding printer menus

Paper Weight menu

Use

Plain Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Card Stock Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Transparency Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Recycled Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Labels Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Bond Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Envelope Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Rough Envelope Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Letterhead Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Preprinted Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

To

Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

103

Understanding printer menus

Use

Colored Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Light Weight

Light

Heavy Weight

Heavy

Rough/Cotton Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

Custom [x] Weight

Light

Normal

Heavy

To

Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify that the relative weight of the paper loaded is light.

Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded is heavy.

Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.

Notes:

Normal is the factory default setting.

The options appear only when the custom type is supported.

Paper Loading menu

Use

Recycled Loading

Duplex

Off

Bond Loading

Duplex

Off

Letterhead Loading

Duplex

Off

Preprinted Loading

Duplex

Off

Colored Loading

Duplex

Off

To

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Recycled as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Bond as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Letterhead as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Preprinted as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Colored as the paper type.

Notes:

Duplex sets two

‑sided printing as the default for all print jobs unless one‑sided printing is set from Printing

Preferences or Print dialog.

If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including one

‑sided jobs.

Off is the factory default setting for all the menus.

104

Understanding printer menus 105

Use

Light Loading

Duplex

Off

Heavy Loading

Duplex

Off

Custom [x] Loading

Duplex

Off

To

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Light as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Heavy as the paper type.

Determine and set two

‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify

Custom [x] as the paper type.

Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only if the custom type is supported.

Notes:

Duplex sets two

‑sided printing as the default for all print jobs unless one‑sided printing is set from Printing

Preferences or Print dialog.

If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including one

‑sided jobs.

Off is the factory default setting for all the menus.

Custom Types menu

Use

Custom Type [x]

Paper

Card Stock

Transparency

Rough/Cotton

Labels

Envelope

Recycled

Paper

Card Stock

Transparency

Rough/Cotton

Labels

Envelope

Cotton

To

Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom Type [x] name or a user

‑defined custom name created in the Embedded Web Server or

MarkVision

TM

Professional. The user

‑defined name appears instead of Custom

Type [x].

Notes:

Paper is the factory default setting for Custom Type [x].

The custom media type must be supported in the selected tray or feeder in order to print from that source.

Specify a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus.

Notes:

Paper is the factory default setting.

The Recycled paper type must be supported in the selected tray or feeder in order to print from that source.

Understanding printer menus

Custom Scan Sizes menu

Use

Custom Scan Size [x]

Scan Size Name

Width

Height

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

2 scans per side

Off

On

106

To

Specify a custom scan size name and page orientation.

Notes:

The custom scan size name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.

ADF Media Type is the factory default setting for custom scan sizes 3, 4,

5, and 6.

8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 210 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Width.

14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 297 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Height.

Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.

Off is the factory default setting for “2 scans per side.”

Universal Setup menu

Use

Units of Measure

Inches

Millimeters

Portrait Width

3–8.5 inches

76–216 mm

Portrait Height

3–14.17 inches

76–360 mm

To

Identify the units of measure.

Notes:

Inches is the US factory default setting.

Millimeters is the international factory default setting.

Set the portrait width.

Notes:

If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the maximum width allowed.

8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the width in 0.01

‑inch increments.

216 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase the width in 1

‑mm increments.

Set the portrait height.

Notes:

If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the maximum height allowed.

14 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the height in 0.01

‑inch increments.

356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase the height in 1

‑mm increments.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Feed Direction

Short Edge

Long Edge

107

To

Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction.

Notes:

Short Edge is the factory default setting.

Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray.

Reports menu

Reports menu

Use

Menu Settings Page

Device Statistics

Network Setup Page

Shortcut List

Fax Job Log

Fax Call Log

Copy Shortcuts

E

mail Shortcuts

Fax Shortcuts

FTP Shortcuts

Profiles List

Print Fonts

Asset Report

To

Print a report containing information about the paper loaded into trays, installed memory, total page count, alarms, timeouts, printer control panel language,

TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other information.

Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages.

Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address information.

Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.

Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.

Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.

Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the

Fax Settings menu.

Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and blocked calls.

Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the

Fax Settings menu.

Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.

Print a report containing information about e

‑mail shortcuts.

Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.

Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.

Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.

Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer.

Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name. The report contains text and UPC bar codes that can be scanned into an asset database.

Understanding printer menus 108

Network/Ports menu

Active NIC menu

Use

Active NIC

Auto

[list of available network cards]

To

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting.

This menu item appears only when an optional network card is installed.

Standard Network or Network [x] menu

Note: Only active ports appear in this menu. All inactive ports are omitted.

Use

PCL SmartSwitch

On

Off

PS SmartSwitch

On

Off

NPA Mode

Off

Auto

To

Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.

Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming data and uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.

Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting.

Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Understanding printer menus 109

Use

Network Buffer

Auto

3KB to [maximum size allowed]

Mac Binary PS

On

Off

Auto

Standard Network Setup or

Network [x] Setup

Reports

Network Card

TCP/IP

IPv6

Wireless

AppleTalk

To

Set the size of the network input buffer.

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting.

The value can be changed in 1KB increments.

The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or

Off.

To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.

Changing this setting from the printer control panel, and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting.

Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.

On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.

Display and set the printer network settings.

Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network.

Reports menu

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports

Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports

Use To

Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.

Network Card menu

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card

Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card

Understanding printer menus

Use

View Card Status

Connected

Disconnected

View Card Speed

Network Address

UAA

LAA

Job Timeout

0–255 seconds

To

View the connection status of the network card.

View the speed of an active network card.

View the network addresses.

Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.

Notes:

90 seconds is the factory default setting.

A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.

If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10.

TCP/IP menu

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP

Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP

Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.

Use

Set Hostname

IP Address

Netmask

Gateway

Enable DHCP

On

Off

Enable RARP

On

Off

Enable BOOTP

On

Off

To

Set the current TCP/IP host name.

Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.

View or change the current TCP/IP address.

Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP.

View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.

View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.

Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Specify the RARP address assignment setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

110

Understanding printer menus 111

Use

Enable AutoIP

Yes

No

Enable FTP/TFTP

Yes

No

Enable HTTP Server

Yes

No

WINS Server Address

Enable DDNS

Yes

No

Enable mDNS

Yes

No

DNS Server Address

Backup DNS Server Address

Backup DNS Server Address 2

Backup DNS Server Address 3

Enable HTTPS

Yes

No

To

Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer

Protocol.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

View or change the current WINS server address.

View or change the current DDNS setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

View or change the current mDNS setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

View or change the current DNS server address.

View or change the backup DNS server addresses.

View or change the current HTTPS setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

IPv6 menu

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > IPv6

Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6

Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.

Use

Enable IPv6

On

Off

Auto Configuration

On

Off

To

Enable IPv6 in the printer.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Specify whether or not the wireless network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus 112

Use

View Hostname

View Address

View Router Address

Enable DHCPv6

On

Off

To

Set the host name.

Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web

Server.

Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Wireless menu

Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to an Ethernet network and printers with a wireless network adapter attached.

To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:

Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Wireless

Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless

Use

Wi

Fi Protected Setup (WPS)

Start Push Button Method

Start PIN Method

Enable/Disable WPS Auto

detection

Enable

Disable

Network Mode

BSS Type

Infrastructure

Ad hoc

To

Establish a wireless network connection and enable network security.

Notes:

Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless network when buttons on both the printer and the access point

(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.

Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the access point.

Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with

WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.

Note: Disable is the factory default setting.

Specify the network mode.

Notes:

Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer access a network using an access point.

Ad hoc configures a wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer.

Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.

Note: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.

Compatibility

802.11b/g

802.11b/g/n

Choose Network

View Signal Quality

View Security Mode

Select an available network for the printer to use.

View the quality of the wireless connection.

View the encryption method for the wireless network.

Understanding printer menus 113

AppleTalk menu

Note: This menu is available only in printer models connected to a wired network or when an optional network card is installed.

To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:

Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk

Network/Ports > Network Setup [x] > AppleTalk

Use

Activate

Yes

No

View Name

To

Enable or disable AppleTalk support.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

View Address

Show the assigned AppleTalk name.

Note: The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.

Show the assigned AppleTalk address.

Note: The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.

Set Zone

[list of zones available on the network]

Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.

Note: The factory default setting is the default zone for the network. If no default zone exists, then the zone marked with an asterisk (*) is the default setting.

SMTP Setup menu

Use

Primary SMTP Gateway

Primary SMTP Gateway Port

Secondary SMTP Gateway

Secondary SMTP Gateway Port

SMTP Timeout

5–30

Reply Address

Use SSL

Disabled

Negotiate

Required

To

Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.

Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.

Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to send an e

‑mail.

Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.

Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the printer.

Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the

SMTP server.

Notes:

Disabled is the factory default setting.

When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if

SSL will be used.

Understanding printer menus 114

Use

SMTP Server Authentication

No authentication required

Login/Plain

CRAM

‑MD5

Digest

‑MD5

NTLM

Kerberos 5

Device

Initiated Email

None

Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device Userid

Device Password

To

Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e

‑mail privileges.

Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.

Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP server.

Notes:

None is the factory default setting for Device

‑Initiated E‑mail.

Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.

Security menu

Security Audit Log menu

Use

Export Log

To

Let an authorized user export the audit log.

Notes:

To export the audit log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be attached to the printer.

The audit log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and saved on a computer.

Specify whether or not audit logs are deleted.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Delete Log

Yes

No

Configure Log

Enable Audit

Yes

No

Enable Remote Syslog

No

Yes

Remote Syslog Facility

0–23

Severity of events to log

0–7

Specify how and whether or not audit logs are created.

Notes:

Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.

Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the factory default setting.

Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.

If the security audit log is activated, then the severity value of each event is recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus 115

Set Date and Time menu

Use

Current Date and Time

Manually Set Date and Time

[input date/time]

Time Zone

[list of time zones]

Automatically observe DST

On

Off

Enable NTP

On

Off

To

View the current date and time settings for the printer.

Enter the date and time.

Notes:

Manually setting the date and time sets Enable NTP to No.

The wizard lets you set the date and time in YYYY

‑MM‑DD‑HH:MM format.

Select the time zone.

Note: GMT is the factory default settings.

Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times associated with the printer Time Zone setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

This setting is turned off if you manually set the date and time.

Understanding printer menus

Settings menu

General Settings menu

Use

Display Language

English

Francais

Deutsch

Italiano

Espanol

Dansk

Norsk

Nederlands

Svenska

Portuguese

Suomi

Russian

Polski

Greek

Magyar

Turkce

Cesky

Simplified Chinese

Traditional Chinese

Korean

Japanese

Show Supply Estimates

Show estimates

Do not show estimates

Eco-Mode

Off

Energy

Energy/Paper

Paper

ADF Loaded Beep

Enabled

Disabled

116

To

Set the language of the text appearing on the printer display.

Note: Not all languages are available for all printers, and you may need to install special hardware for those languages to appear.

Display the estimates of the supplies on the printer control panel,

Web page, menu settings, and the device statistics reports.

Note: Show estimates is the factory default setting.

Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting. This resets the printer to its factory default settings.

Energy minimizes the power used by the printer.

Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.

Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media.

Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.

Specify whether or not the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded.

Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Run Initial setup

Yes

No

Paper Sizes

US

Metric

Scan to PC Port Range

[port range]

Home screen customization

Change Language

Copy

Fax

Fax shortcuts

E

‑mail shortcuts

FTP shortcuts

Search held jobs

Held jobs

Bookmarks

Jobs by user

One Page Copy

Off

On

Allow Background Removal

On

Off

Allow Custom Job Scans

On

Off

Scanner Jam recovery

Job Level page Level

117

To

Run the setup wizard.

Notes:

Yes is the factory default setting.

After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the country or region selection screen, the default becomes No.

Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes.

Notes:

U.S. is the factory default setting.

The initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard.

Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers separated by a semicolon.

Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.

Change the icons and buttons that appear on the printer display.

For each icon or button, select from the following options:

Display

Do not display

Notes:

Display is the factory default setting for Copy, Fax, Search

Held Jobs, and Held jobs.

Do not display is the factory default setting for Change

Language, Fax shortcuts, E

‑mail shortcuts, FTP shortcuts,

Bookmarks, and Jobs by user.

Set copies from the printer to only one page at a time.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Specify whether image background removal is allowed in copy, and fax jobs.

Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the image will be removed.

Scan multiple jobs to one file.

Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, then

Allow Custom Job Scans can be enabled for specific jobs.

Specify how a scan job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADF.

Note: Job Level is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Alarms

Alarm Control

Cartridge Alarm

Timeouts

Sleep Mode

Disabled

1–120 min

Disabled is the factory default setting for printers except for

European Union countries and Switzerland.

“3 days” is the factory default setting for Class B printers in all European Union countries and Switzerland.

118

To

Set an alarm to sound when the printer requires user intervention.

When activated, Alarm Control lets you set the number of times that the alarm sounds, while Cartridge Alarm lets you stop printing when a cartridge

‑low condition occurs.

For each alarm type, select from the following options:

Off

Single

Continuous

Notes:

Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. This sounds three quick beeps.

Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm. This means no alarm will sound.

Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.

Set the amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it goes into a reduced power state.

Notes:

“30 min” is the factory default setting.

Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to Off.

Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require longer warm

‑up times.

Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm

‑up time.

Set the amount of time the printer waits before it goes to Hibernate mode.

Notes:

Timeouts

Timeout

Disabled

1 hour

2 hours

3 hours

6 hours

1 day

2 days

3 days

1 week

2 weeks

1 month

Timeouts

Hibernate Timeout on Connection

Hibernate

Do Not Hibernate

Set the printer to hibernate mode when there is an active Ethernet connection.

Note: Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Timeouts

Screen Timeout

15–300 sec

Timeouts

Print Timeout

Disabled

1–255 sec

Timeouts

Wait Timeout

Disabled

15–65535 sec

Error Recovery

Auto Reboot

Reboot when idle

Reboot always

Reboot never

Error Recovery

Max Auto Reboots

1

‑20

Print Recovery

Auto Continue

Disabled

5–255

Print Recovery

Jam Recovery

On

Off

Auto

119

To

Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before returning the display to the Ready state.

Note: “30 sec” is the factory default setting.

Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end

‑of‑job message before canceling the remainder of the print job.

Notes:

“90 sec “is the factory default setting.

When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the printer is printed, and then the scanner checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting.

Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.

This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.

Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print job.

Notes:

“40 sec” is the factory default setting.

Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using

PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs.

Automatically reboot the printer back into the normal operation.

Note: “Reboot when idle” is the factory default setting.

Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can perform.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when these are not resolved within the specified time period.

Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.

Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.

Notes:

Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks.

On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.

Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Print Recovery

Jam Assist

On

Off

Print Recovery

Page Protect

Off

On

Press Sleep Button

Do nothing

Sleep

Hibernate

Press and Hold Sleep Button

Do nothing

Sleep

Hibernate

Factory Defaults

Do Not Restore

Restore Now

Custom Home Message

Off

IP Address

Hostname

Contact Name

Location

Zero Configuration Name

Custom Text [x]

120

To

Set the printer to automatically check for jammed paper.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Let the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting. This prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.

On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints.

Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short press of the Sleep button.

Note: Sleep is the factory default setting.

Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a long press of the Sleep button.

Note: “Do nothing” is the factory default setting.

Return the printer settings to the factory default settings.

Notes:

Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. This keeps the user

‑defined settings.

Restore Now returns all scanner settings to the factory default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted.

Create a custom home message that appears during warnings, printer errors and the Home Prime/Status state.

Notes:

The maximum number of characters for a custom message is

40 (NV 80 bytes). If the custom message requires more than

2 lines, then normal scrolling behavior will occur.

When the Home Prime/Status has a custom message and there is a warning with custom message, the Home

Prime/Status condition is shown first.

Understanding printer menus

Copy Settings menu

Use

Content Type

Text

Graphics

Text/Photo

Photo

Content Source

Black/White Laser

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Sides (Duplex)

1 sided to 1 sided

1 sided to 2 sided

2 sided to 1 sided

2 sided to 2 sided

To

Specify the content of the original document.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Specify how the original document was produced.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

121

Specify whether an original document is two

‑sided (duplex) or one‑sided, and then specify whether the copy should be two

‑sided or one‑sided.

Notes:

1 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on one side and the copy will also have print on one side.

1 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on one side, while the copy will have print on both sides.

2 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on both sides, while the copy will have print on just one side.

2 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on both sides, and the copy will also have print on both sides.

Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Paper Saver

Off

2

‑up Portrait

2

‑up Landscape

4

‑up Portrait

4

‑up Landscape

Print Page Borders

On

Off

Collate

(1,1,1) (2,2,2)

(1,2,3) (1,2,3)

Specify whether or not a border is printed.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies.

Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Original Size

Letter

Legal

Executive

Folio

Statement

Oficio (Mexico)

Universal

Auto Size Sense

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5

Custom Scan Size [x]

Book Original

Business Card

3 x 5 in.

4 x 6 in.

ID Card

Copy To Source

Tray [x]

Auto Size Match

Manual Feeder

Transparency Separators

On

Off

Separator Sheets

Off

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Between Pages

Separator Sheet Source

Tray [x]

Darkness

1–9

Number of Copies

1–999

To

Specify the paper size of the original document.

Notes:

Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.

A4 is the international factory default setting.

Specify the paper source for copy jobs.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Specify the separator sheet source.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Lighten or darken the print on the copy.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Specify the number of copies for the copy job.

Note: 1 is the factory default setting.

122

Understanding printer menus

Use

Overlay

Confidential

Copy

Draft

Urgent

Custom

Off

Allow priority copies

On

Off

Allow Save as Shortcut

On

Off

Background Removal

‑4 to 4

Auto Center

Off

On

Contrast

0–5

Best for content

Mirror Image

Off

On

Negative Image

Off

On

Shadow Detail

‑4 to 4

ADF Skew Fix

Off

On

Scan edge to edge

Off

On

Sharpness

1–5

Sample Copy

Off

On

To

Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Automatically align the content at the center of the page.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Specify the contrast used for the copy job.

Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Create a negative image of the original document.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Correct slight skew in the scanned image.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Specify if the original document is scanned edge

‑to‑edge.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Create a sample copy of the original document.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

123

Understanding printer menus 124

Fax Settings menu

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu

Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.

Use

Fax Name

Fax Number

Fax ID

Fax Name

Fax Number

Enable Manual Fax

On

Off

To

Specify the name of the fax in the printer.

Specify the number assigned to the fax.

Specify how the fax is identified.

Memory Use

All receive

Mostly receive

Equal

Mostly send

All send

Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number.

Press # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.

Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs.

Notes:

“Equal” is the factory default setting. This splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.

“Mostly send” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.

“All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.

“All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.

“Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.

Specify whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs.

Note: Allow is the factory default setting.

Cancel Faxes

Allow

Don't Allow

Caller ID

Off

Primary

Alternate

Fax number masking

Off

From left

From right

Digits to Mask

0–58

Specify the type of caller ID being used.

Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask” setting.

Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Fax Cover Page

Fax Cover Page

Off by default

On by default

Never use

Always use

Include to Field

On

Off

Include from Field

On

Off

Include Message Field

On

Off

Include Logo

On

Off

Fax Send Settings

Use

Resolution

Standard

Fine 200 dpi

Super Fine 300 dpi

Original Size

Letter

Legal

Executive

Folio

Statement

Oficio (Mexico)

Universal

Auto Size Sense

Mixed Sizes

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5

Custom Scan Size [x]

Book Original

Business Card

3 x 5 in.

4 x 6 in.

To

Configure the fax cover page.

Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.

125

To

Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality, but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.

Note: Standard is the factory default setting.

Specify the paper size of the original document.

Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Content Type

Text

Graphics

Text/Photo

Photo

Content Source

Black/White Laser

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Darkness

1–9

Dial Prefix

Automatic Redial

0–9

Redial frequency

1–200

Behind a PABX

Yes

No

Enable ECM

Yes

No

Enable Fax Scans

On

Off

Driver to fax

Yes

No

Allow Save as Shortcut

On

Off

Dial Mode

Tone

Pulse

To

Specify the content of the original document.

Note: Text is the factory default setting.

Specify how the original document was produced.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

126

Lighten or darken the output.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.

Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Specify the number of minutes between redials.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.

Note: No is the factory default setting.

Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Fax files that are scanned at the printer.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Allow the printer driver to send fax jobs.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Specify the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse.

Note: Tone is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Max Speed

2400

4800

9600

14400

33600

Custom Job scanning

On

Off

Background Removal

‑4 to 4

Contrast

0–5

Best for content

Mirror Image

Off

On

Negative Image

Off

On

Shadow Detail

‑4 to 4

ADF Skew Fix

Auto

Off

On

Sharpness

1–5

Fax Receive Settings

Use

Enable Fax Receive

On

Off

Fax Job Waiting

None

Toner

Toner and Supplies

Rings to Answer

1–25

To

Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.

Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.

Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Specify the contrast in the scanned image.

Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Create a negative image of the original document.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Correct the slight skew in the scanned image.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Adjust the sharpness of a fax.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

To

Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable resources.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

127

Understanding printer menus

Use

Auto Reduction

On

Off

Paper Source

Auto

Tray [x]

Multi

‑Purpose Feeder

Fax Footer

On

Off

Max Speed

2400

4800

9600

14400

33600

Fax Forwarding

Print

Print and Forward

Forward

Forward to

Fax

E

‑mail

FTP

LDSS eSF

Forward to Shortcut

Block No Name Fax

Off

On

Fax Log Settings

Use

Transmission Log

Print log

Do not print log

Print only for error

Receive Error Log

Print Never

Print on Error

128

To

Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax source.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.

Note: Auto is the factory default setting.

Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.

Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.

Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.

Note: Print is the factory default setting.

Specify the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded.

Notes:

Fax is the factory default setting.

This menu is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.

Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF).

Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no fax ID specified.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

To

Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.

Note: Print log is the factory default setting.

Enable printing of a receive error log following a receive error.

Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Auto Print Logs

On

Off

Log Paper Source

Tray [x]

Manual Feeder

Logs Display

Remote Station Name

Dialed Number

Enable Job Log

On

Off

Enable Call Log

On

Off

Speaker Settings

Use

Speaker Mode

Always Off

On until Connected

Always On

Speaker Volume

High

Low

Ringer Volume

Off

On

To

Enable automatic printing of fax logs.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.

Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or fax name returned.

Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.

Enable access to the Fax Job log.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Enable access to the Fax Call log.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

129

To

Specify the mode of the speaker.

Notes:

“On until Connected” is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the fax connection is made.

“Always On” turns the speaker on.

“Always Off” turns the speaker off.

Control the volume setting.

Note: High is the factory default setting.

Control the fax speaker ringer volume.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Answer On

Use

All Rings

Single Ring Only

Double Ring Only

Triple Ring Only

Single or Double Rings Only

Single or Triple Rings Only

Double or Triple Rings Only

E

mail Settings menu

Use

E

mail Server Setup

Send me a copy

Never appears

On by default

Off by default

Always On

E

mail Server Setup

Max E

‑mail size

0–65535 KB

Format

PDF (.pdf)

Secure PDF

TIFF (.tif)

JPEG (.jpg)

XPS (.xps)

PDF Version

1.2–1.6

A–1a

Content Type

Graphics

Text

Text/Photo

Photo

Content Source

Black/White Laser

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

To

Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.

Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.

To

Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.

Note: “Never appears” is the factory default setting.

Specify the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes.

Note: E-mails larger than the specified size are not sent.

Specify the format of the scanned file.

Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.

Set the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e

‑mailing.

Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.

Specify the content of the original document.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Specify how the original document was produced.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

130

Understanding printer menus

Use

Resolution

75 dpi

150 dpi

200 dpi

300 dpi

400 dpi

600 dpi

Darkness

1–9

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

Original Size

Letter

Legal

Executive

Folio

Statement

Oficio (Mexico)

Universal

Auto Size Sense

Mixed Sizes

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5

Custom Scan Size [x]

Book Original

Business Card

3 x 5 in.

4 x 6 in.

Sides (Duplex)

Off

Long edge

Short edge

To

Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.

Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.

Lighten or darken the output.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Specify the orientation of the scanned image.

Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Specify the paper size of the document being scanned.

Notes:

A4 is the international factory default setting.

Letter is the US factory default setting.

Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).

Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).

131

Understanding printer menus

Use

JPEG Quality

Best for content

5–90

Text Default

5–90

Text/Photo Default

5–90

Photo Default

5–90

E

mail images sent as

Attachment

Web Link

Use Multi

Page Tiff

On

Off

Transmission Log

Print log

Do not print log

Print only for error

Log Paper Source

Tray [x]

Manual Feeder

Custom Job scanning

On

Off

Allow Save as Shortcut

On

Off

Background Removal

‑4 to 4

Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail

Destination screen.

Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

132

To

Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image.

Notes:

“Best for content” is the factory default setting.

5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.

90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.

This menu setting applies to all scan functions.

Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.

Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.

Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.

Note: 50 is the factory default setting.

Specify how the images are sent.

Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.

Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple

‑page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan

‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

This menu applies to all scan functions.

Specify whether or not the transmission log prints.

Note: Print log is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Contrast

0–5

Best for content

Mirror Image

Off

On

Negative Image

Off

On

Shadow Detail

‑4 to 4

ADF Skew Fix

Auto

Off

On

Scan edge to edge

Off

On

Sharpness

1–5

Use cc:/bcc:

Off

On

FTP Settings menu

Use

Format

PDF (.pdf)

Secure PDF (.pdf)

TIFF (.tif)

JPEG (.jpg)

XPS (.xps)

PDF Version

1.2–1.6

A–1a

Content Type

Text

Graphics

Text/Photo

Photo

To

Specify the contrast of the output.

Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Create a negative image of the original document.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Correct slight skew in the scanned image.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Enable the use of the cc: and bcc: fields.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

To

Specify the format of the file for FTP sending.

Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.

Set the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending.

Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.

Specify the content of the original document.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

133

Understanding printer menus

Use

Content Source

Black/White Laser

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Resolution

75 dpi

150 dpi

200 dpi

300 dpi

400 dpi

600 dpi

Darkness

1–9

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

Original Size

Letter

Legal

Executive

Folio

Statement

Oficio (Mexico)

Universal

Auto Size Sense

Mixed Sizes

A4

A5

A6

JIS B5

Custom Scan Size [x]

Book Original

Business Card

3 x 5 in.

4 x 6 in.

To

Specify how the original document was produced.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).

Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.

Lighten or darken the output.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Specify the orientation of the scanned image.

Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Specify the paper size of the original document.

Notes:

Letter is the US factory default setting.

A4 is the international factory default setting.

134

Understanding printer menus

Use

Sides (Duplex)

Off

Long Edge

Short Edge

JPEG Quality

Best for content

5–90

Text Default

5–90

Text/Photo Default

5–90

Photo Default

5–90

Use Multi

Page TIFF

On

Off

Transmission Log

Print log

Do not print log

Print only for error

Log Paper Source

Tray [x]

Manual Feeder

Custom Job Scanning

On

Off

Allow Save as Shortcut

On

Off

Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

135

To

Specify the page orientation of text and graphics.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

Long Edge sets binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).

Short Edge sets binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).

Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.

Notes:

“Best for content” is the factory default setting.

5 reduces the image quality and the file size.

90 produces the best image quality at an increased file size.

This menu setting applies to all scan functions.

Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.

Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.

Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.

Note: 50 is the factory default setting.

Choose between single-page TIFF files and multiple

‑page TIFF files.

For a multiple-page scan

‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.

Notes:

On is the factory default setting.

This menu setting applies to all scan functions.

Specify whether or not the transmission log prints.

Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Background Removal

‑4 to 4

Contrast

0–5

Best for content

Mirror Image

Off

On

Negative Image

Off

On

Shadow Detail

‑4 to 4

ADF Skew Fix

Auto

Off

On

Scan edge to edge

Off

On

Sharpness

1–5

Print Settings

Setup menu

Use

Printer Language

PCL Emulation

PS Emulation

Print Area

Normal

Whole Page

To

Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Specify the contrast of the output.

Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Create a negative image of the original document.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Correct slight skew in the scanned image.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Adjust the amount of sharpness of a scanned image

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

136

To

Set the default printer language.

Notes:

PS Emulation is the factory default printer language.

Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language.

Set the logical and physical printable area.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to print data in the non

‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Resource Save

On

Off

Finishing menu

Use

Sides (Duplex)

1 sided

2 sided

Duplex Binding

Long Edge

Short Edge

Copies

1–999

Blank Pages

Do Not Print

Print

Collate

(1,1,1) (2,2,2)

(1,2,3) (1,2,3)

137

To

Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a job that requires more memory than is available.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to retain the downloads only until memory is needed.

Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.

On retains the downloads during language changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then

Memory Full [38]

appears, and downloads are not deleted.

To

Specify whether two

‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the user default setting for all print jobs.

Notes:

“1 sided” is the factory default setting.

You can set two

‑sided printing from the software program.

For Windows users:

Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.

For Macintosh users:

Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and pop

‑up menus.

Define the way two

‑sided pages are bound and printed.

Notes:

Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).

Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).

Specify the default number of copies for each print job.

Note: 1 is the factory default setting.

Specify whether or not blank pages are inserted in a print job.

Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.

Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Separator Sheets

Off

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Between Pages

Separator Source

Tray [x]

Manual Feeder

138

To

Specify whether or not blank separator sheets are inserted.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if

Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.

Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.

Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document.

Specify the paper source for separator sheets.

Notes:

Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.

From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for Manual Feeder to appear as a menu setting.

Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

When the number of pages per sheet is selected, each page is scaled so that the number of pages you want can be displayed on the sheet.

Paper Saver

Off

2

‑Up

3

‑Up

4

‑Up

6

‑Up

9

‑Up

12

‑Up

16

‑Up

Paper Saver Ordering

Horizontal

Reverse Horizontal

Reverse Vertical

Vertical

Paper Saver Orientation

Auto

Landscape

Portrait

Paper Saver Border

None

Solid

Specify the order in which pages are printed on a single sheet when using Paper Saver.

Notes:

Horizontal is the factory default setting.

Positioning depends on the number of pages and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation.

Specify the orientation in which pages are printed on a single sheet.

Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.

Print a border when using Paper Saver.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Quality menu

Use

Print Resolution

300 dpi

600 dpi

1200 dpi

1200 Image Q

2400 Image Q

Pixel Boost

Off

Fonts

Horizontally

Vertically

Both directions

Isolated

Toner Darkness

1–10

Enhance Fine Lines

On

Off

Gray Correction

Auto

Off

Brightness

‑6 to 6

Contrast

0–5

To

Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch.

Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting.

139

Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance images horizontally or vertically, or to enhance fonts.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Lighten or darken the printed output.

Notes:

8 is the factory default setting.

Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.

Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical circuit diagrams, and flow charts.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

You can set this option from the printer software. For Windows users, click File >

Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop

‑up menus.

To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP address in the Web browser address field.

Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.

Note: Auto is the factory default setting.

Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve toner by lightening the output.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Adjust the contrast of printed objects.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

XPS menu

Use

Print Error Pages

Off

On

PDF menu

Use

Scale to Fit

Yes

No

Annotations

Do Not Print

Print

PCL Emul menu

Use

Font Source

Resident

Download

All

Font Name

Courier 10

Symbol Set

10U PC

‑8

12U PC

‑850

PCL Emulation Settings

Point Size

1.00–1008.00

To

Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

To

Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.

Note: No is the factory default setting.

Print annotations in a PDF.

Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

140

To

Specify the set of fonts used in the Font Name menu.

Notes:

“Resident” is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.

“Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.

“All” shows all fonts available to any option.

Identify a specific font and where it is stored.

Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting.

Specify the symbol set for each font name.

Notes:

10U PC

‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international factory default setting.

A symbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters, punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs, such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.

Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.

Notes:

12 is the factory default setting.

Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 0.014 of an inch. This can be increased or decreased in 0.25

‑point increments.

Understanding printer menus

Use

PCL Emulation Settings

Pitch

0.08–100.00

PCL Emulation Settings

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

PCL Emulation Settings

Lines per Page

1–255

PCL Emulation Settings

A4 Width

198 mm

203 mm

PCL Emulation Settings

Auto CR after LF

On

Off

PCL Emulation Settings

Auto LF after CR

On

Off

141

To

Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.

Notes:

10 is the factory default setting.

Pitch refers to the number of fixed

‑space characters per inch (cpi). This can be increased or decreased in 0.01

‑cpi increments.

For non

‑scalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed.

Specify the orientation of text and graphics on a page.

Notes:

Portrait is the factory default setting. It prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.

Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.

Specify the number of lines that print on each page.

Notes:

60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.

The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the

Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the paper size and orientation before setting Lines per Page.

Set the printer to print on A4

‑size paper.

Notes:

198 mm is the factory default setting.

The 203

‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10

‑pitch characters.

Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after a line feed (LF) control command.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a carriage return (CR) control command.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Use

Tray Renumber

Assign MP Feeder

Off

None

0–199

Assign Tray [x]

Off

None

0–199

Assign Manual Paper

Off

None

0–199

Assign Manual Envelope

Off

None

0–199

Tray Renumber

View Factory Defaults

MPF Default = 8

T1 Default = 1

T2 Default = 4

T3 Default = 5

T4 Default = 20

T5 Default = 21

Env Default = 6

MPaper Default = 2

MEnv Default = 3

Tray Renumber

Restore Defaults

Yes

No

Show the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.

Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.

142

To

Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays and feeders.

Notes:

“Off” is the factory default setting.

“None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter.

“0–199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.

Understanding printer menus

HTML menu

Use

Font Name

Albertus MT

Antique Olive

Apple Chancery

Arial MT

Avant Garde

Bodoni

Bookman

Chicago

Clarendon

Cooper Black

Copperplate

Coronet

Courier

Eurostile

Garamond

Geneva

Gill Sans

Goudy

Helvetica

Hoefler Text

Intl CG Times

Intl Courier

Intl Univers

Use

Font Size

1–255 pt

Joanna MT

Letter Gothic

Lubalin Graph

Marigold

MonaLisa Recut

Monaco

New CenturySbk

New York

Optima

Oxford

Palatino

StempelGaramond

Taffy

Times

TimesNewRoman

Univers

Zapf Chancery

NewSansMTCS

NewSansMTCT

New SansMTJA

NewSansMTKO

To

Set the default font for HTML documents.

Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not specify a font.

Scale

1–400%

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

To

Set the default font size for HTML documents.

Notes:

12 pt is the factory default setting.

Font size can be increased in 1

‑point increments.

Scale the default font for HTML documents.

Notes:

100% is the factory default setting.

Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.

Set the page orientation for HTML documents.

Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

143

Understanding printer menus 144

Use

Margin Size

8–255 mm

To

Set the page margin for HTML documents.

Notes:

19 mm is the factory default setting.

Margin size can be increased in 1

‑mm increments.

Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.

Note: Print is the factory default setting.

Backgrounds

Do Not Print

Print

Image menu

Use

Auto Fit

On

Off

Invert

On

Off

Scaling

Anchor Top Left

Best Fit

Anchor Center

Fit Height/Width

Fit Height

Fit Width

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

Reverse Portrait

Reverse Landscape

To

Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.

Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images.

Invert bitonal monochrome images.

Notes:

Off is the factory default setting.

This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.

Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.

Notes:

Best Fit is the factory default setting.

When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.

Set the image orientation.

Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Help menu

The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.

English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available at

http://support.lexmark.com

.

Menu item

Print All Guides

Copy Guide

Description

Prints all the guides

Provides information about making copies and changing settings

Understanding printer menus

Menu item

E

‑mail Guide

Fax Guide

FTP Guide

Print Defects Guide

Information Guide

Supplies Guide

145

Description

Provides information about sending e

‑mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings

Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings

Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an

FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings

Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints

Provides help in locating additional information

Provides part numbers for ordering supplies

Saving money and the environment 146

Saving money and the environment

Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:

The Notices chapter

The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at

www.lexmark.com/environment

The Lexmark recycling program at

www.lexmark.com/recycle

By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.

Saving paper and toner

Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.

For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see "Using Eco-Mode."

Using recycled paper

As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for

use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled paper and other office papers” on page 44.

Conserving supplies

Use both sides of the paper

If your printer model supports duplex printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper by selecting 2

sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar.

Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper

You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple

‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N

‑Up) section of the Print dialog screen.

Check your first draft for accuracy

Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:

Use the preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the document will look like before you print it.

Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.

Avoid paper jams

Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 168.

Saving money and the environment 147

Saving energy

Using Eco

Mode

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > General Settings > Eco

Mode.

3

Select a setting.

Use

Off

Energy

To

Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco

‑Mode.

Notes:

Settings that were changed when other modes were selected are reset to the factory default settings.

Off supports the performance specifications of the printer.

Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.

Notes:

Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed.

The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.

The printer display is turned off when the printer is in Sleep mode.

Lights on the staple finisher and other optional finishers are turned off when the printer is in

Sleep mode.

Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.

Plain Paper Enable the automatic two

‑sided (duplex) printing feature.

4

Click Submit.

Reducing printer noise

Enable Quiet mode to reduce the printer noise.

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings >

2

Select a setting.

> Settings > > General Settings > > Quiet Mode >

Saving money and the environment 148

Use

On

Off

To

Reduce printer noise.

Notes:

Print jobs process at a reduced speed.

Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. There is a short delay before the first page is printed.

The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off.

The printer ignores the Advance Start command.

Use factory default settings.

Note: This setting supports the performance specifications of the printer.

3

Press .

Adjusting Sleep mode

To save energy, decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep mode. Select from 1 to 120. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.

Note: The printer still accepts print jobs when in Sleep mode.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Timeouts

3

In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode.

4

Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > > Settings > > General Settings > > Timeouts > > Sleep Mode >

2

In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode.

3

Press .

Saving money and the environment 149

Using Hibernate mode

Hibernate is an ultra

‑low‑power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.

Notes:

Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job. A hard reset or a long press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode.

The Hibernate mode can be scheduled. For more information, see “Using Schedule Power Modes” on page 150.

If the printer is in Hibernate mode, the Embedded Web Server is disabled.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If your are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.

3

From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” drop

‑down menu, select Hibernate.

4

Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > > Settings > > General Settings >

2

Press the arrow buttons until Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button appears, and then press .

3

Press the arrow buttons until Hibernate appears, and then press .

Notes:

When Press Sleep Button is set to Hibernate, a short press of the Sleep button sets the printer to Hibernate mode.

When Press and Hold Sleep Button is set to Hibernate, a long press of the Sleep button sets the printer to

Hibernate mode.

Adjusting the brightness of the printer display

To save energy, or if you have trouble reading the display, adjust its brightness settings.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Saving money and the environment 150

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > General Settings.

3

In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.

4

Click Submit.

Using Schedule Power Modes

Schedule Power Modes lets the user schedule when the printer goes into a reduced power state or into the Ready state.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > General Settings > Schedule Power Modes.

3

From the Action menu, select the power mode.

4

From the Time menu, select the time.

5

From the Day(s) menu, select the day or days.

6

Click Add.

Recycling

Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information, see:

The Notices chapter

The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at

www.lexmark.com/environment

The Lexmark recycling program at

www.lexmark.com/recycle

Recycling Lexmark products

To return Lexmark products for recycling:

1

Go to

www.lexmark.com/recycle

.

2

Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.

3

Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.

Saving money and the environment 151

Recycling Lexmark packaging

Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.

Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.

The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.

When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the box.

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling

Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.

To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:

1

Go to

www.lexmark.com/recycle

.

2

From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.

3

Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Securing the printer 152

Securing the printer

Statement of Volatility

Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.

Type of memory

Volatile memory

Non-volatile memory

Description

Your printer uses standard random access memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs.

Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:

EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to store operating system, device settings, and network information.

Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:

The printer is being decommissioned.

The printer is being moved to a different department or location.

The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.

The printer is being removed from your premises for service.

The printer is being sold to another organization.

Erasing volatile memory

The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered data, simply turn off the printer.

Erasing non

volatile memory

Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase information and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.

Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.

1

Turn off the printer.

2

Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.

The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully powered up, the printer displays a list of functions.

3

Press the up or down arrow button until Wipe All Settings appears.

The printer will restart several times during this process.

Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords from the printer memory.

4

Navigate to:

Back > Exit Config Menu

Securing the printer 153

The printer will perform a power

‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Finding printer security information

In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the

Lexmark security Web page

.

You can also see the Embedded Web Server Administrator’s Guide for additional information:

1

Go to

http://support.lexmark.com

, and then click SELECT YOUR PRODUCT.

2

From the “Search by Product Category” section, navigate to Software and Solutions > Other Applications.

3

Click the Manuals tab, and then select the Embedded Web Server Administrator’s Guide.

Maintaining the printer 154

Maintaining the printer

Cleaning the printer parts

Cleaning the printer

Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.

Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty.

1

Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.

2

Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.

3

Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.

4

Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the exterior of the printer.

5

Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.

Maintaining the printer

Cleaning the scanner glass

Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.

1

Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.

2

Open the scanner cover.

155

3

Clean all the areas shown, and then let them dry.

1 White underside of the scanner cover

2 Scanner glass

3 ADF glass

4 White underside of the ADF cover

4

Close the scanner cover.

Maintaining the printer 156

Checking the status of parts and supplies

A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.

Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Status/Supplies > > View Supplies >

Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server

Note: Make sure the computer and printer are connected to the same network.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Device Status > More Details.

Estimated number of remaining pages

The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy may vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings, and other printer settings.

The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is different from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, initial estimates assume future supplies consumption based on the International Organization for Standardization* test methods and page content.

* Average continuous black declared cartridge yield in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.

Maintaining the printer 157

Ordering supplies

To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at

www.lexmark.com

or contact the place where you purchased the printer.

The Lexmark Return Program lets you purchase Lexmark supplies at a discounted price in exchange for your agreement to use the supplies only once and return them only to Lexmark for remanufacturing or recycling.

Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies

Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts is not covered by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.

Ordering toner cartridges

Notes:

The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19752 standard.

Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield.

Item

United States and Canada

Toner Cartridge

High Yield Toner Cartridge

Return Program cartridge

601

601H

European Union (EU), European Economic Area (EEA), and Switzerland

Toner Cartridge 602

High Yield Toner Cartridge

Asia Pacific region (includes Australia and New Zealand)

Toner Cartridge

High Yield Toner Cartridge

602H

603

603H

Latin America (includes Puerto Rico and Mexico)

Toner Cartridge 604

High Yield Toner Cartridge 604H

Africa, Middle East, Central Eastern Europe (non

EU), and Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS)

Toner Cartridge 605

High Yield Toner Cartridge 605H

For more information on countries located in each region, visit

www.lexmark.com/regions

.

Maintaining the printer 158

Item

Worldwide

High Yield Toner Cartridge

Regular cartridge

600HA

Ordering a maintenance kit

Notes:

Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.

The separator roller, fuser, pick rollers, transfer roller, and redrive assembly are all included in the maintenance kit and can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary.

Contact your service representative to replace the maintenance kit.

Recommended maintenance kits and part numbers

Maintenance kit

100

‑V maintenance kit

*

110

‑V maintenance kit

220

‑V maintenance kit

* This is available only in Japan.

Part number

40X9146

40X9135

40X9136

Ordering an ADF separator pad

Order an ADF separator pad when the ADF fails to pick paper or picks more than one sheet of paper at a time.

For information on replacing the ADF separator pad, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.

Recommended part number

Part name

Separator pad

Part number

40X6247

Ordering an imaging unit

Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner from toner cartridge.

For more information on replacing the imaging unit, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Part name

Imaging unit

Lexmark Return Program

500Z

Regular

500ZA

Maintaining the printer 159

Storing supplies

Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them.

Do not expose supplies to:

Direct sunlight

Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)

High humidity above 80%

Salty air

Corrosive gases

Heavy dust

Replacing supplies

Replacing the toner cartridge

1

Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.

Maintaining the printer

2

Pull the toner cartridge out using the handle.

160

3

Unpack the toner cartridge, and then remove all packing materials.

4

Shake the new cartridge to redistribute the toner.

5

Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.

Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

6

Close the front door.

Maintaining the printer

Replacing the imaging unit

1

Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.

161

2

Pull the toner cartridge out using the handle.

3

Lift the green handle, and then pull the imaging unit out of the printer.

Maintaining the printer

4

Unpack the new imaging unit, and then shake it.

162

5

Remove all packing materials from the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.

Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.

6

Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer.

Maintaining the printer 163

7

Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer.

8

Close the front door.

Moving the printer

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

Before moving the printer

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:

Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.

If an optional tray is installed, then remove it from the printer. To remove the optional tray, slide the latch on the right side of the tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.

Maintaining the printer 164

Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.

Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.

Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.

Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.

Moving the printer to another location

The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:

Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.

Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware options.

Keep the printer in an upright position.

Avoid severe jarring movements.

Shipping the printer

When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.

Managing the printer 165

Managing the printer

Finding advanced networking and administrator information

This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server

Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark Web site at

http://support.lexmark.com

.

Checking the virtual display

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen.

The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.

Setting up e

mail alerts

Configure the printer to send you e

‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low, when the paper needs to be changed or added, or when there is a paper jam.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings.

3

From the Other Settings menu, click E

mail Alert Setup.

4

Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e

‑mail addresses.

5

Click Submit.

Note: For information on setting up the e

‑mail server, contact your system support person.

Viewing reports

You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer, network, and supplies.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Managing the printer 166

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.

Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web

Server

You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their end

‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.

Notes:

Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.

All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable alerts can be set for the end

‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions.

The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some supply conditions.

1

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

2

Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.

3

From the drop

‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:

Notification

Off

E

‑mail Only

Warning

Description

The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.

The printer generates an e

‑mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of the supply appears on the menus page and status page.

The printer displays the warning message and generates an e

‑mail about the status of the supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.

Continuable Stop

1

Non Continuable Stop

1,2

The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user needs to press a button to continue printing.

The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be replaced to continue printing.

1

The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.

2

The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.

4

Click Submit.

Managing the printer 167

Restoring factory default settings

If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring

the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 29.

If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All

Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non

‑volatile memory” on page 152.

Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in printer hard disk are not affected.

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Settings > Settings > > General Settings > > Factory Defaults > > Restore Now >

Clearing jams 168

Clearing jams

Jam error messages appear on the printer display and include the area of the printer where the jam occurred. When there is more than one jam, the number of jammed pages is displayed.

Avoiding jams

Load paper properly

Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.

Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper

Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.

Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.

Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.

Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.

Clearing jams 169

Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly against the paper or envelopes.

Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.

Use recommended paper

Use only recommended paper or specialty media.

Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.

Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.

Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.

Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.

Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.

Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.

Understanding jam messages and locations

When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer display. Open the doors, covers, and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam.

Notes:

When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer automatically flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints to the standard bin after a jammed page has been cleared. Check your printed output stack for discarded pages.

When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages. However, the Auto setting does not guarantee that the page will reprint.

Clearing jams 170

1

2

Jam access area

Automatic document feeder (ADF)

Standard bin

Printer control panel message What to do

[x]

‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx]

[x]

‑page jam, clear standard bin. [20y.xx]

Remove all paper from the ADF tray, and then remove the jammed paper.

Remove the jammed paper.

3

Front door [x]

‑page jam, open front door. [20y.xx]

4

Multipurpose feeder [x]

‑page jam, clear manual feeder. [250.xx]

5

Tray 1 [x]

‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx]

Open the front door, then remove the toner cartridge and imaging unit, and then the jammed paper.

Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and then remove the jammed paper.

Pull out tray 1 completely, then push the front duplex flap down, and then remove the jammed paper.

Note: You may need to open the rear door to clear some 23y.xx paper jams.

6

7

Tray [x]

Rear door

[x]

‑page jam, remove tray

[x]. [24y.xx]

[x]

‑page jam, open rear door. [20y.xx]

Pull out the indicated tray, and then remove the jammed paper.

Open the rear door, and then remove the jammed paper.

Clearing jams

[x]

page jam, open front door. [20y.xx]

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

1

Press the button on the right side of the printer, and then open the front door.

171

2

Pull the toner cartridge out using the handle.

Clearing jams

3

Lift the green handle, and then pull the imaging unit out of the printer.

172

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny blue photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may affect the quality of future print jobs.

4

Place the imaging unit aside on a flat, smooth surface.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.

Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

5

Lift the green flap in front of the printer.

Clearing jams

6

Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

173

7

Insert the imaging unit by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the unit with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer, and then insert the imaging unit into the printer.

8

Insert the toner cartridge by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer, and then insert the cartridge into the printer.

Clearing jams 174

9

Close the front door.

10

From the printer control panel, touch to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, select Next > > Clear the jam, press OK > .

[x]

page jam, open rear door. [20y.xx]

1

Open the front door to loosen the jammed paper in the rear door.

2

Gently pull down the rear door.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

3

Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams 175

4

Close the rear door, and then the front door.

5

From the printer control panel, touch to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, select Next > > Clear the jam, press OK > .

[x]

page jam, clear standard bin. [20y.xx]

1

Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

2

From the printer control panel, touch to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, select Next > > Clear the jam, press OK > .

Clearing jams

[x]

page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [23y.xx]

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

1

Pull the tray completely out of the printer.

176

2

Locate the blue lever, and then pull it down to release the jam.

3

Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams 177

4

Insert the tray.

5

From the printer control panel, touch to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, select Next > > Clear the jam, press OK > .

[x]

page jam, open tray [x]. [24y.xx]

1

Pull the tray completely out of the printer.

Note: The message on the printer display indicates the tray where the jammed paper is located.

2

Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams 178

3

Insert the tray.

4

From the printer control panel, touch to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, select Next > > Clear the jam, press OK > .

[x]

page jam, clear manual feeder. [25y.xx]

1

From the multipurpose feeder, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

2

Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Clearing jams

3

Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder.

179

Note: Make sure the paper guide lightly rests against the edge of the paper.

4

From the printer control panel, touch to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, select Next > > Clear the jam, press OK > .

[x]

page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx]

1

Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.

Note: The message is cleared when the pages are removed from the ADF tray.

2

Open the ADF cover.

3

Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

4

Close the ADF cover.

Clearing jams 180

5

Straighten the edges of the original documents, then load the original documents into the ADF, and then adjust the paper guide.

6

From the printer control panel, touch to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, select Next > > Clear the jam, press OK > .

Troubleshooting 181

Troubleshooting

Understanding printer messages

Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch [41.xy]

1

Check if the toner cartridge and imaging unit are both MICR (Magnetic Imaging Content Recording) or non-MICR supplies.

Note: For a list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User's Guide or visit

www.lexmark.com

.

2

Change the toner cartridge or imaging unit so that both are MICR or non

‑MICR supplies.

Notes:

Use MICR toner cartridge and imaging unit for printing checks and other similar documents.

Use non-MICR toner cartridge and imaging unit for regular print jobs.

Cartridge low [88.xy]

You may need to order a toner cartridge. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Cartridge nearly low [88.xy]

If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]

You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.

If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then verify that the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Cancel the print job.

Troubleshooting 182

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following

Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Cancel the print job.

Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]

From the printer control panel, try one or more of the following:

Select Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job.

Select Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the last successful scan job.

Select Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.

Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying, faxing, or e-mailing.

Select Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.

For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Close front door

Close the front door of the printer.

Troubleshooting 183

Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]

Try one or more of the following:

From the printer control panel, select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Cancel the current print job. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Install additional printer memory.

Defective flash detected [51]

Try one or more of the following:

Replace the defective flash memory card.

From the printer control panel, select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Cancel the current print job.

Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.

An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.

Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.

An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.

Fax memory full

From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.

Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.

Try either of the following:

From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Turn the printer off, and then turn it back on. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person or see the “Setting up the printer to fax” section of the User’s Guide.

Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.

Try either of the following:

From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Troubleshooting 184

Fax Station Name not set up. Contact system administrator.

Try either of the following:

From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system support person.

Fax Station Number not set up. Contact system administrator.

Try either of the following:

From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again after completing the setup, then contact your system support person.

Imaging unit low [84.xy]

You may need to order an imaging unit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy]

If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]

You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon. For more information, see the "Replacing supplies" section of the

User’s Guide.

If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the correct size of paper in the tray.

From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Check the tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.

Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in the Printing Preferences or in the Print dialog.

Troubleshooting 185

Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.

Make sure that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed.

Cancel the print job.

Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]

Try one or more of the following:

From the printer control panel, select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Delete fonts, macros, and other data from the printer memory.

Install additional printer memory.

Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]

The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.

Select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.

Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]

Try one or more of the following:

From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.

Insufficient memory to collate job [37]

Try one or more of the following:

From the printer control panel, select Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

Cancel the current print job.

to confirm.

Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]

Install additional printer memory or select Continue on the printer control panel to disable Resource Save, clear the message, and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Troubleshooting 186

Load manual feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.

Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue printing.

Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or is selected, then the printer automatically overrides the request, and then prints from an automatically selected tray.

Cancel the current job.

Load manual feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the multipurpose feeder with the correct size and type of paper.

Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue printing.

Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or the request, and then prints from an automatically selected tray.

is selected, then the printer manually overrides

Cancel the current job.

Load manual feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the multipurpose feeder with the correct size of paper.

Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue printing.

Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or the request, and then prints from an automatically selected tray.

is selected, then the printer manually overrides

Cancel the current job.

Load manual feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the multipurpose feeder with the correct size and type of paper.

Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue printing.

Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or the request, and then prints from an automatically selected tray.

is selected, then the printer manually overrides

Cancel the current job.

Troubleshooting 187

Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.

To use the tray that has the correct size or type of paper, select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.

For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from the default paper source.

Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.

To use the tray that has the correct size or type of paper, select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.

For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from the default paper source.

Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.

To use the tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper, select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from the default paper source.

Cancel the current job.

Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.

To use the tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper, select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from the default paper source.

Troubleshooting 188

Cancel the current job.

Maintenance kit low [80.xy]

You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, contact customer support at

http://support.lexmark.com

or your service representative. If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]

For more information, contact customer support at

http://support.lexmark.com

or your service representative. If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy]

You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, contact customer support at

http://support.lexmark.com

or your service representative.

If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Memory full, cannot print faxes

From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message without printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Note: Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer restarts.

Memory full, cannot send faxes

1

From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and cancel the fax job. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

2

Do either of the following:

Reduce the fax resolution, and then resend the fax job.

Reduce the number of pages in the fax, and then resend fax job.

Memory full [38]

Try one or more of the following:

From the printer control panel, select Cancel job to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Install additional printer memory.

Troubleshooting 189

Network [x] software error [54]

Try one or more of the following:

From the printer control panel, select Continue to continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.

No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.

Connect the printer to an analog phone line.

Non

Lexmark [supply type], see User’s Guide [33.xy]

Note: The supply type can be toner cartridge or imaging unit.

The printer has detected a non

‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.

Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components.

All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or associated components.

Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.

To accept any and all of these risks and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your printer, press and hold and the # button on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds.

For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to clear the message and continue printing.

and on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds

If you do not wish to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer, and then install a genuine Lexmark supply or part.

Note: For a list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User's Guide or visit

www.lexmark.com

.

Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]

Try one or more of the following:

From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.

Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.

Note: Downloaded fonts and macros that are not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.

Troubleshooting 190

Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.

From the printer control panel, touch to clear the message and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

For more information, visit

http://support.lexmark.com

or contact customer support.

Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]

Try one or more of the following:

Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, install the toner cartridge.

For information on installing the cartridge, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.

If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.

Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the cartridge is defective. Replace the toner cartridge.

Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit [31.xy]

Try one or more of the following:

Check if the imaging unit is missing. If missing, install the imaging unit.

For information on installing the imaging unit, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.

If the imaging unit is installed, then remove the unresponsive imaging unit, and then reinstall it.

Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the imaging unit is defective. Replace the imaging unit.

Remove paper from standard output bin

Remove the paper stack from the standard bin. The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing.

If removing the paper does not clear the message, then select Continue on the printer control panel. For non-touchscreen printer models, press to confirm.

Replace all originals if restarting job.

From the printer control panel, try one or more of the following:

Select Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.

Select Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job.

Select Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.

Select Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.

Select Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.

For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Troubleshooting 191

Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]

Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.

Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit

www.lexmark.com

.

Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy]

Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:

List of printer and toner cartridge regions

5

9

3

4

1

2

Region number

0

Region

Global

United States, Canada

European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland

Asia Pacific, Australia, New Zealand

Latin America

Africa, Middle East, rest of Europe

Invalid

Notes:

The x and y values are the .xy of the error code shown on the printer control panel.

The x and y values must match for printing to continue.

Replace defective imaging unit [31.xy]

Replace the defective imaging unit to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit

www.lexmark.com

.

Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]

Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.

Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit

www.lexmark.com

.

Troubleshooting 192

Replace jammed originals if restarting job.

From the printer control panel, try one or more of the following:

Select Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Select Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan job. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Select Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Select Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Select Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy]

Contact customer support at

http://support.lexmark.com

or your service representative, and then report the message.

The printer is scheduled for maintenance.

Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]

Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s

Guide.

Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit

www.lexmark.com

.

Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy]

Remove the imaging unit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s

Guide.

Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or visit

www.lexmark.com

.

Scanner automatic feeder cover open

Close the ADF cover.

Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]

Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.

Troubleshooting 193

Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02]

From the printer control panel, try one or more of the following:

Select Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.

Select Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.

Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.

For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]

Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.

Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]

Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.

Serial option [x] error [54]

Try one or more of the following:

Make sure that the serial cable is properly connected and is the correct one for the serial port.

Make sure that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer and computer.

From the printer control panel, select Continue to continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.

SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.

From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Standard network software error [54]

Try one or more of the following:

From the printer control panel, select Continue to continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

to confirm.

Turn off the printer and then turn it back on.

Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.

Troubleshooting 194

Standard USB port disabled [56]

From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.

Notes:

The printer discards any data received through the USB port.

Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.

Supply needed to complete job

Do either of the following:

Install the missing supply to complete the job.

Cancel the current job.

Too many flash options installed [58]

1

Turn off the printer.

2

Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

3

Remove the extra flash memory.

4

Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

5

Turn the printer back on.

Too many trays attached [58]

1

Turn off the printer.

2

Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

3

Remove the extra trays.

4

Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

5

Turn the printer back on.

Unformatted flash detected [53]

Try one or more of the following:

From the printer control, select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

Format the flash memory.

to confirm.

Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and need to be replaced.

Troubleshooting 195

Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.

Select Continue to clear the message. For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, press

Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

to confirm.

Solving printer problems

“Basic printer problems” on page 195

“Hardware and internal option problems” on page 197

“Paper feed problems” on page 199

Basic printer problems

The printer is not responding

Action

Step 1

Make sure the printer is turned on.

Yes

Go to step 2.

No

Turn on the printer.

Is the printer turned on?

Step 2

Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.

Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?

Step 3

Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Press the Sleep button to wake the printer from Sleep mode or

Hibernate mode.

Go to step 3.

Go to step 4.

Plug one end of the power cord into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?

Step 4

Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.

Does other electrical equipment work?

Unplug the other electrical equipment, and then turn on the printer. If the printer does not work, then reconnect the other electrical equipment.

Go to step 5.

Troubleshooting 196

Action Yes

Step 5

Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted in the correct ports.

Go to step 6.

Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?

Step 6

Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker.

Turn on the switch or reset the breaker.

No

Make sure to match the following:

The USB symbol on the cable with the

USB symbol on the printer

The appropriate

Ethernet cable with the Ethernet port

Go to step 7.

Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?

Step 7

Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.

Connect the printer power cord directly to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords?

Step 8

Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other network device.

Go to step 9.

Go to step 8.

Connect the printer cable securely to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device.

Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device?

Step 9

Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing material.

Go to step 10.

Turn off the printer, remove all packing materials, then reinstall the hardware options, and then turn on the printer.

Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material removed?

Step 10

Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver.

Go to step 11.

Use correct printer driver settings.

Are the port settings correct?

Step 11

Check the installed printer driver.

Go to step 12.

Install the correct printer driver.

Is the correct printer driver installed?

Step 12

Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Is the printer working?

Troubleshooting 197

Printer display is blank

Action

Step 1

Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.

Yes No

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Does Ready appear on the printer display?

Step 2

Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

The problem is solved. Turn off the printer, and then contact

customer support

.

Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?

Hardware and internal option problems

Cannot detect internal option

Action Yes No

Step 1

Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer.

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Does the internal option operate correctly?

Step 2

Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board.

a

Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

b

Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector in the controller board.

c

Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

Go to step 3.

Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?

Step 3

Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal option is listed in the Installed Features list.

Go to step 4.

Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?

Connect the internal option to the controller board.

Reinstall the internal option.

Troubleshooting 198

Action Yes No

Step 4 a

Check if the internal option is selected.

It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see

“Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 23.

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Does the internal option operate correctly?

Tray problems

Action Yes No

Step 1 a

Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:

Check for paper jams or misfeeds.

Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.

If you are printing on custom

‑size paper, then make sure that the paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.

Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.

Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.

b

Check if the tray closes properly.

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Is the tray working?

Step 2 a

Turn off the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Is the tray working?

Step 3

Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.

Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed in the

Installed Features list.

Go to step 4.

Reinstall the tray. For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the tray.

Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?

Step 4

Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.

Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it

available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 23.

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Is the tray available in the printer driver?

Troubleshooting 199

Paper feed problems

Jammed pages are not reprinted

Action a

Turn on jam recovery.

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Jam Recovery

2

Select On or Auto.

3

Depending on your printer model, press or touch Submit.

b

Resend the pages that did not print.

Yes No

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Were the jammed pages reprinted?

Paper frequently jams

Action Yes

Step 1 a

Pull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:

Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.

Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.

Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.

Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.

Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type.

b

Insert the tray properly.

If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint automatically.

Go to step 2.

Do paper jams still occur frequently?

Step 2 a

Load paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 3.

Do paper jams still occur frequently?

Step 3 a

Review the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 168.

b

Follow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.

Contact

customer support

.

Do paper jams still occur frequently?

No

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting 200

Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared

Action a

Do either of the following:

For touch

‑screen printer models, touch

or Done.

For non

‑touch‑screen printer models, select Next >

> Clear

Yes

Contact

customer support

.

the jam, press OK > .

b

Follow the instructions on the printer display.

Does the paper jam message remain?

No

The problem is solved.

Solving print problems

Printing problems

Incorrect characters print

Action

Step 1

Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.

Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn off the printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode.

Yes

Deactivate Hex Trace mode.

No

Go to step 2.

Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?

Step 2 a

From the printer control panel, select Standard Network or

Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.

b

Resend the print job.

Do incorrect characters print?

Contact

customer support

.

The problem is solved.

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper

Action

Step 1 a

Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.

b

Resend the print job.

Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?

Yes No

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Troubleshooting

Action Yes No

Step 2 a

From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?

Step 3 a

Depending on your operating system, open Printing Preferences or the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 4.

Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?

Step 4 a

Check if the trays are not linked.

b

Resend the print job.

Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Large jobs do not collate

Action

Step 1 a

From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set Collate to

“(1,2,3) (1,2,3).”

b

Resend the print job.

Yes No

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Did the job print and collate correctly?

Step 2 a

From the printer software, set Collate to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).”

Note: Setting Collate to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2)” in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Did the job print and collate correctly?

Step 3

Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Did the job print and collate correctly?

201

Troubleshooting

Multiple

language PDF files do not print

Action Yes No

Step 1 a

Check if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts.

For more information, see the documentation that came with Adobe

Acrobat.

b

Generate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Do the files print?

Step 2 a

Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.

b

Click File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Do the files print?

Print jobs do not print

Action Yes No

Step 1 a

From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog and check if you have selected the correct printer.

Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must select the printer for each document that you want to print.

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Do the jobs print?

Step 2 a

Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears on the printer display.

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Do the jobs print?

Step 3

If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the message.

Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.

The problem is solved. Go to step 4.

Do the jobs print?

202

Troubleshooting

Action

Step 4 a

Check if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if the cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer.

Note: For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.

b

Resend the print job.

Yes No

The problem is solved. Go to step 5.

Do the jobs print?

Step 5 a

Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 6.

Do the jobs print?

Step 6 a

Remove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more

information, see “Installing the printer software” on page 23.

Note: The printer software is available at

http://support.lexmark.com

.

b

Resend the print job.

Do the jobs print?

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Print job takes longer than expected

Action

Step 1

Change the environmental settings of the printer.

a

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings

b

Select Eco

Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select Off.

Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the consumption of energy or supplies, or both.

Yes No

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Did the job print?

Step 2

Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then resend the job

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Did the job print?

203

Troubleshooting 204

Action

Step 3 a

Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory.

b

Resend the print job.

Yes No

The problem is solved. Go to step 4.

Did the job print?

Step 4 a

Disable the Page Protect feature.

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 5.

Did the job print?

Step 5 a

Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure. For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Did the job print?

Printing slows down

Notes:

When printing using narrow paper, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.

The printer speed may be reduced when printing for long periods of time, or printing at elevated temperatures.

Action Yes No

Step 1 a

Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser type.

Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and a

220-volt fuser for printing on A4

‑size paper.

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Does the print speed increase?

Step 2 a

Replace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Does the print speed increase?

Troubleshooting

Tray linking does not work

Notes:

The trays can detect paper length.

The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper

Size/Type menu.

Action Yes No

Step 1 a

Open the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the same size and type.

Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in each tray.

Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Do the trays link correctly?

Step 2 a

From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked.

Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked.

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Do the trays link correctly?

Unexpected page breaks occur

Action

Step 1

Adjust the print timeout settings.

a

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Print Timeout

b

Select a higher setting and then, depending on your printer model, select or Submit.

c

Resend the print job.

Yes No

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Did the file print correctly?

Step 2 a

Check the original file for manual page breaks.

b

Resend the print job.

Did the file print correctly?

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

205

Troubleshooting

Print quality problems

Characters have jagged or uneven edges

206

Action Yes

Step 1 a

Print a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported by the printer.

1

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Menus > Reports > Print Fonts

2

Select PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 2.

No

Select a font that is supported by the printer.

Are you using fonts that are supported by the printer?

Step 2

Check if the fonts installed on the computer are supported by the printer.

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Are the fonts installed on the computer supported by the printer?

Clipped pages or images

Leading edge

ABCDE

ABCDE

ABCDE

Trailing edge

Action Yes

Step 1 a

Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper loaded.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 2.

Is the page or image clipped?

No

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting 207

Action

Step 2

From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Yes

Go to step 3.

Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray?

No

Do one or more of the following:

Specify the paper size from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings.

The problem is solved.

Step 3 a

Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from

Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 4.

Is the page or image clipped?

Step 4 a

Reinstall the imaging unit.

1

Remove the toner cartridge.

2

Remove the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

3

Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b

Resend the print job.

Contact

customer support

.

Is the page or image clipped?

The problem is solved.

Compressed images appear on prints

Note: Printing on letter-size paper using a 220-volt fuser compresses images.

Action Yes No

Step 1 a

Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser type.

Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and a

220-volt fuser for printing on A4

‑size paper.

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Do compressed images still appear?

Troubleshooting

Action

Step 2 a

Replace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.

b

Resend the print job.

Yes No

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Do compressed images still appear?

Gray background on prints

Leading edge

ABCDE

ABCDE

ABCDE

Trailing edge

Action

Step 1 a

From the Quality Menu on the printer control panel, decrease the toner darkness.

Note: 8 is the factory default setting.

b

Resend the print job.

Did the gray background disappear from the prints?

Step 2

Reinstall the imaging unit and the toner cartridge.

a

Remove the toner cartridge.

b

Remove the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems.

c

Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

d

Resend the print job.

Did the gray background disappear from the prints?

Step 3

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Did the gray background disappear from the prints?

Yes No

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

208

Troubleshooting

Horizontal voids appear on prints

Leading edge

209

Trailing edge

Action

Step 1 a

Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.

b

Resend the print job.

Yes

Go to step 2.

Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

Step 2 a

Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 3.

Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

Step 3 a

Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.

1

Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

2

Firmly shake the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

3

Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 4.

Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

Step 4

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Contact

customer support

.

Do horizontal voids appear on prints?

No

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting

Incorrect margins on prints

210

A B C D

A B C D

A B C D

Action Yes No

Step 1 a

Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Are the margins correct?

Step 2

From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?

Step 3 a

Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from

Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 3.

Do one or more of the following:

Specify the paper size from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings.

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Are the margins correct?

Troubleshooting 211

Paper curl

Action Yes

Step 1

Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded.

Go to step 2.

Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?

Step 2

From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Go to step 3.

Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in the tray?

Step 3 a

Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 4.

Is the paper still curled?

Step 4 a

Remove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 5.

Is the paper still curled?

Step 5 a

Load paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

b

Resend the print job.

Contact

customer support

.

Is the paper still curled?

Print irregularities

Leading edge

)

ABCDE

ABCDE

Trailing edge

No

Adjust the width and length guides.

Specify the paper type and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting 212

Action Yes

Step 1 a

Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 2.

No

The problem is solved.

Do print irregularities still appear?

Step 2

From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Go to step 3.

Specify the paper size and type from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded in the tray?

Step 3 a

Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 4.

The problem is solved.

Do print irregularities still appear?

Step 4

Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.

Are you printing on textured or rough paper?

Step 5 a

Load paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

b

Resend the print job.

From the printer control panel, set the paper texture in the

Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Go to step 5.

Go to step 6.

The problem is solved.

Do print irregularities still appear?

Step 6

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Do print irregularities still appear?

Contact

customer support

at

http://support.lexmar

k.com

or your service representative.

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting

Print is too dark

213

Action Yes

Step 1 a

From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the toner darkness.

Note: 8 is the factory default setting.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 2.

Is the print still too dark?

Step 2 a

From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 3.

Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?

No

The problem is solved.

Do one or more of the following:

Specify the paper type, texture, and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper type, texture and weight specified in the tray settings.

The problem is solved.

Step 3 a

Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 4.

Is the print still too dark?

Step 4

Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.

Are you printing on textured or rough paper?

From the printer control panel, change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on.

Go to step 5.

Troubleshooting 214

Action

Step 5 a

Load paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

b

Resend the print job.

Yes

Go to step 6.

Is the print still too dark?

Step 6

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Is the print still too dark?

Contact

customer support

.

Print is too light

No

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

Action Yes

Step 1 a

From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase the toner darkness.

Note: 8 is the factory default setting.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 2.

Is the print still too light?

Step 2

From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Go to step 3.

Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?

Step 3 a

Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 4.

Is the print still too light?

No

The problem is solved.

Change the paper type, texture, and weight to match the paper loaded in the tray.

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting 215

Action

Step 4

Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.

Are you printing on textured or rough paper?

Step 5 a

Load paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

b

Resend the print job.

Yes

From the printer control panel, change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on.

Go to step 6.

No

Go to step 5.

The problem is solved.

Is the print still too light?

Step 6 a

Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.

1

Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

2

Firmly shake the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

3

Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 7.

Is the print still too light?

Step 7

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Contact

customer support

.

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

Is the print still too light?

Printer is printing blank pages

Troubleshooting 216

Action Yes

Step 1 a

Check if there is packing material left on the imaging unit.

1

Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

2

Check if the packing material is properly removed from the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

3

Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 2.

Is the printer still printing blank pages?

Step 2 a

Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.

1

Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

2

Firmly shake the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

3

Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 3.

Is the printer still printing blank pages?

Step 3

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Is the printer still printing blank pages?

Contact

customer support

.

Printer is printing solid black pages

No

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting 217

Action

Step 1 a

Reinstall the imaging unit.

1

Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

2

Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b

Resend the print job.

Yes

Go to step 2.

Is the printer printing solid black pages?

Step 2

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Contact

customer support

.

Is the printer printing solid black pages?

Repeating defects appear on prints

No

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

Action

Step 1

Measure the distance between the defects.

Check for a distance between the defects that equals:

97 mm (3.82 in.)

47 mm (1.85 in.)

38 mm (1.5 in.)

Is the distance between defects equal to one of the listed measurements?

Step 2

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Do the repeating defects still appear?

Yes

Go to step 2.

No

1

Check if the distance between the defects equal to 80 mm (3.15 in.)

2

Take note of the distance, and then

contact

customer support

at

http://support.le

xmark.com

or your service representative.

Contact

customer support

at

http://support.lexma

rk.com

or your service representative.

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting 218

Shadow images appear on prints

Leading edge

A B C D

A B C D

Trailing edge

Action

Step 1

Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.

Yes

Go to step 2.

Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?

Step 2

From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Go to step 3.

Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded?

Step 3 a

Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.

b

Resend the print job.

Do shadow images still appear on prints?

Step 4

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Do shadow images still appear on prints?

Go to step 4.

Contact

customer support

.

Skewed print

No

Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.

Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper type and weight specified in the tray settings.

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

)

ABCDE

ABCDE

Troubleshooting 219

Action Yes

Step 1 a

Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 2.

Is the print still skewed?

Step 2 a

Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray.

b

Resend the print job.

Is the print still skewed?

Contact

customer support

.

Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints

No

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

ABCDE

ABCDE

ABCDE

Action Yes

Step 1 a

Depending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder from

Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 2.

Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

Step 2

From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Go to step 3.

Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in the tray?

Step 3 a

Load paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 4.

Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

No

The problem is solved.

Change the paper type and weight to match the paper loaded in the tray.

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting 220

Action

Step 4 a

Reinstall the imaging unit.

1

Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

2

Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b

Resend the print job.

Yes

Go to step 5.

Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

Step 5

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?

Contact

customer support

.

Streaked vertical lines appear on prints

Leading edge

ABCDE

ABCDE

ABCDE

Trailing edge

Action Yes

Step 1 a

Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 2.

Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?

Step 2

From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Go to step 3.

Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?

No

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

No

The problem is solved.

Do one or more of the following:

Specify the paper texture, type, and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper texture, type, and weight specified in the tray settings.

Troubleshooting 221

Action

Step 3 a

Load paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

b

Resend the print job.

Yes

Go to step 4.

Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?

Step 4 a

Reinstall the imaging unit.

1

Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

2

Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 5.

Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?

Step 5

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?

No

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

Contact

customer support

at

http://support.lexmar

k.com

or your service representative.

The problem is solved.

Toner fog or background shading appears on prints

ABCDE

ABCDE

ABCDE

Action

Step 1

Reinstall the imaging unit.

a

Remove, and then install the imaging unit.

b

Resend the print job.

Does fog or shading appear on prints?

Step 2

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Does fog or shading appear on prints?

Yes

Go to step 2.

No

The problem is solved.

Contact

customer support

at

http://support.lexmar

k.com

or your service representative.

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting 222

Toner rubs off

Leading edge

ABC

DEF

Trailing edge

Action

Step 1

From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper type and weight.

Do the paper type and texture match the paper loaded in the tray?

Step 2

Check if you are printing on paper with texture or rough finishes.

Are you printing on textured or rough paper?

Yes

Go to step 2.

No

Specify the paper type and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.

From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper texture.

Contact

customer support

.

Toner specks appear on prints

Action

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Do toner specks appear on prints?

Yes

Contact

customer support

.

Transparency print quality is poor

Action

Step 1

From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

Yes

Go to step 2.

Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?

Step 2 a

Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency.

b

Resend the print job.

Is the print quality still poor?

Contact

customer support

.

No

The problem is solved.

No

Set the paper type to

Transparency.

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting

Uneven print density

223

Action

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Is the print density uneven?

Vertical voids appear on prints

Leading edge

Yes

Contact

customer support

.

No

The problem is solved.

Trailing edge

Action

Step 1 a

Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.

b

Resend the print job.

Yes

Go to step 2.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Step 2 a

From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the

Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 3.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Step 3

Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.

a

Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.

b

Resend the print job.

Go to step 4.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

No

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting 224

Action

Step 4 a

Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit.

1

Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.

2

Firmly shake the imaging unit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.

3

Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.

b

Resend the print job.

Yes

Go to step 5.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

Step 5

Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.

Contact

customer support

.

Do vertical voids appear on prints?

No

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

Solving copy problems

“Copier does not respond” on page 224

“Scanner unit does not close” on page 225

“Poor copy quality” on page 225

“Partial document or photo copies” on page 226

Copier does not respond

Action

Step 1

Check if an error or status message appears on the display.

Yes No

Clear the error or status message.

Go to step 2.

Does an error or status message appear?

Step 2

Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Go to step 3.

Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?

Step 3

Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it back on.

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?

Troubleshooting 225

Scanner unit does not close

Action

Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and the printer.

a

Lift the scanner unit.

b

Remove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open.

c

Lower the scanner unit.

Did the scanner unit close properly?

Yes No

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Poor copy quality

Action

Step 1

Check if an error or status message appears on the display.

Does an error or status message appear?

Step 2

Check the quality of the original document.

Yes No

Clear the error or status message.

Go to step 2.

Go to step 3.

Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?

Step 3

If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.

Go to step 4.

Is the scanner glass clean?

Step 4

Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.

a

From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco

‑Mode settings.

b

From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.

c

If the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.

Go to step 5.

Is the print quality satisfactory?

Step 5

Check the placement of the document or photo.

Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Go to step 6.

Is the document or photo loaded correctly?

Increase the scan resolution setting for a higher

‑quality output.

See “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 155.

See “Print quality problems” on page 206.

Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Troubleshooting 226

Action Yes

Step 6

Check the copy settings.

From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.

Go to step 7.

Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned?

Step 7

Check for patterns on print.

a

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Copy > Sharpness > select a lower setting

Note: Make sure no scaling is being selected.

b

Resend the copy job.

Go to step 8.

Do patterns appear on prints?

Step 8

Check for missing or faded text on prints.

a

From the Copy screen, adjust the settings of the following:

Sharpness—Increase the sharpness setting.

Contrast—Increase the contrast setting.

b

Resend the copy job.

Do prints have missing or faded text?

Step 9

Check for washed

‑out or overexposed output.

a

From the Copy screen, adjust the settings of the following:

Background Removal—Reduce the current setting.

Darkness—Increase the current setting.

b

Resend the copy job.

Do pages show washed

‑out or overexposed prints?

Go to step 9.

Contact

customer support

.

Partial document or photo copies

Action Yes

Step 1

Check the placement of the document or photo.

Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Go to step 2.

Is the document or photo loaded correctly?

No

Change the Content

Type and Content

Source settings to match the document being scanned.

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

The problem is solved.

No

Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Troubleshooting 227

Action Yes

Step 2

Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the tray.

From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper

Size setting.

Go to step 3.

No

Change the paper size setting to match the paper loaded in the tray, or load the tray with paper that matches the paper size setting.

Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the tray.

Step 3 a

Specify the paper size. Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.

b

Resend the print job.

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Do copies print properly?

Solving fax problems

“Fax function is not set up” on page 227

“Caller ID is not shown” on page 228

“Cannot send or receive a fax” on page 229

“Can send but not receive faxes” on page 231

“Can receive but not send faxes” on page 232

“Received fax has poor print quality” on page 233

Fax function is not set up

Before completing these instructions for network printers, check if the fax cables are connected.

Note: The indicator light blinks red until you set up fax.

Troubleshooting

Action a

From the printer control panel, navigate to:

> Run initial setup >

Yes No

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

> Settings > > General Settings >

>

b

Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.

The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer display.

c

Select a language, and then press .

d

Select a country or region, and then press .

e

Select a time zone, and then press .

f

Press the up or down arrow button to scroll to Fax, and then press

.

Is the fax function set up?

Caller ID is not shown

Action

Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.

Notes:

If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).

The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns.

Contact your telephone company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use.

Does the caller ID appear?

Yes No

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

228

Troubleshooting 229

Cannot send or receive a fax

Action

Step 1

Check if an error or status message appears on the display.

Is there an error or status message on the display?

Step 2

Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Yes No

Clear the error or status message.

Go to step 2.

Go to step 3.

Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?

Step 3

Check the power.

Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears on the display.

Go to step 4.

Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?

Step 4

Check the printer connections.

If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following equipment are secure:

Telephone

Handset

Answering machine

Go to step 5.

Turn on the printer, and then wait until

Ready

appears on the display.

Securely connect the cables.

Are the cable connections secure?

Step 5 a

Check the telephone wall jack.

1

Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.

2

Listen for a dial tone.

3

If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone cable into the wall jack.

4

If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone cable into a different wall jack.

5

If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.

b

Try sending or receiving a fax.

The problem is solved. Go to step 6.

Can you send or receive a fax?

Troubleshooting 230

Action Yes

Step 6

Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector.

The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.

If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an

ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an Rinterface port, contact your ISDN provider.

If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL provider.

If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If none exists, then consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.

Go to step 7.

No

Connect the printer to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector.

Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital connector?

Step 7

Check for a dial tone.

Go to step 8.

Did you hear a dial tone?

Try calling the fax number to make sure that it is working properly.

If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax.

If you are using the

On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to check if you hear a dial tone.

Step 8

Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters) between the printer and the telephone line, and then try sending or receiving a fax.

The problem is solved. Go to step 9.

Can you send or receive a fax?

Step 9 a

Temporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling call waiting.

b

Try sending or receiving a fax.

The problem is solved. Go to step 10.

Can you send or receive a fax?

Troubleshooting

Action Yes No

Step 10 a

Temporarily disable voice mail service. For more information, contact your telephone company.

Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.

b

Try sending or receiving a fax.

The problem is solved. Go to step 11.

Can you send or receive a fax?

Step 11

Scan the original document one page at a time.

a

Dial the fax number.

b

Scan the document one page at a time.

Can you send or receive a fax?

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Can send but not receive faxes

Action

Step 1

Check the tray or feeder.

If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.

Yes No

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Can you receive faxes?

Step 2

Check the ring count delay settings.

a

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the

Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

b

Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.

c

In the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers.

d

Click Submit.

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Can you receive faxes?

231

Troubleshooting

Action

Step 3

Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.

Yes No

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Can you receive faxes?

Can receive but not send faxes

Action

Step 1

Check if the printer is in Fax mode.

From the printer control panel, press Fax to put the printer in fax mode, and then resend the fax job.

Yes No

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Can you send faxes?

Step 2 a

Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Notes:

Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.

The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.

b

Resend the fax job.

Can you send faxes?

Step 3 a

Check if the shortcut number is configured for the number that you want to dial.

Note: As an alternative, you can dial the telephone number manually.

b

Resend the fax job.

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Can you send faxes?

232

Troubleshooting

Received fax has poor print quality

Action

Step 1

Ask the person who sent you the fax to:

a

Check if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.

b

Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.

c

Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.

Yes No

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

Step 2

Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.

a

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.

Notes:

View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the

Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.

b

Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.

c

In the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:

2400

4800

9600

14400

33600

d

Click Submit.

e

Resend the fax.

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

Step 3

Replace the toner cartridge.

When Cartridge low [88.xy] appears, replace the cartridge, and then resend the fax.

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

Solving scanner problems

“The scanner does not respond” on page 234

“Scan job was not successful” on page 235

“Scanner unit does not close” on page 235

233

Troubleshooting 234

“Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer” on page 235

“Poor scanned image quality” on page 236

“Partial document or photo scans” on page 237

The scanner does not respond

Action

Step 1

Check if the printer is turned on.

Yes

Go to step 2.

No

Turn on the printer.

Is the printer turned on?

Step 2

Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device.

Go to step 3.

Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device?

Step 3

Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Go to step 4.

Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet?

Step 4

Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker.

Turn on the switch or reset the breaker.

Connect the printer cable securely to the printer and the computer, print server, option, or other network device.

Connect the power cord to the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Go to step 5.

Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?

Step 5

Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.

Connect the printer power cord directly to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords?

Step 6

Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet.

Are the other electrical equipment working?

Step 7

Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

Go to step 6.

Unplug the other electrical equipment and turn on the printer.

If the printer does not work, then reconnect the other electrical equipment and then go to step 6.

Go to step 7.

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Are the printer and scanner working?

Troubleshooting 235

Scan job was not successful

Action

Step 1

Check the cable connections.

Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.

Yes

Go to step 2.

No

Connect the cables properly.

Are the cables securely connected?

Step 2

Check if the file name is already in use.

Change the file name.

Go to step 3.

Is the file name already in use?

Step 3

Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another application or being used by another user.

Close the file you are scanning.

Is the file you want to scan open by another application or user?

Step 4

Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing file check box is selected in the destination configuration settings.

Contact

customer support

.

Go to step 4.

Select the Append time

stamp or Overwrite

existing file check box in the destination configuration settings.

Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box selected in the destination configuration settings?

Scanner unit does not close

Action

Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit.

a

Lift the scanner unit.

b

Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.

c

Lower the scanner unit.

Did the scanner unit close correctly?

Yes No

The problem is solved. Contact

customer support

.

Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer

Action

Step 1

Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.

Close all applications that are not being used.

Yes

Go to step 2.

Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?

No

The problem is solved.

Troubleshooting 236

Action

Step 2

Select a lower scan resolution.

Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?

Yes

Contact

customer support

.

Poor scanned image quality

Action

Step 1

Check if an error message appears on the display.

Yes

Clear the error message.

Is there an error message on the printer display?

Step 2

Check the quality of the original document.

Go to step 3.

Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?

Step 3

Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint

‑free cloth dampened with water.

Go to step 4.

Is the scanner glass clean?

Step 4

Check the placement of the document or photo.

Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Go to step 5.

Is the document or photo loaded correctly?

Step 5

Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.

From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco

‑Mode settings.

From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.

When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.

Go to step 6.

Is the print quality satisfactory?

Step 6

Check the scan settings.

From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and Content Source settings are correct for the document being scanned.

Go to step 7.

Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the document being scanned?

No

The problem is solved.

No

Go to step 2.

Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher

‑quality output.

See “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 155.

Place the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

See “Print quality problems” on page 206.

Change the Content

Type and Content

Source settings to match the document being scanned.

Troubleshooting 237

Action

Step 7

Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher

‑quality output.

Did the increased resolution produce a higher

‑quality output?

Yes

Problem solved.

Partial document or photo scans

Action Yes

Check the placement of the document or photo.

Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Contact

customer support

.

Is the document or photo loaded correctly?

No

Contact

customer support

.

No

Load the document or photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Embedded Web Server does not open

Action

Step 1 a

Turn on the printer.

b

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.

c

Press Enter.

Yes No

The problem is solved. Go to step 2.

Does the Embedded Web Server open?

Step 2

Make sure the printer IP address is correct.

a

View the printer IP address:

From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu

By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section

Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

b

Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address.

Note: Depending on the network settings, you may need to type

https://” instead of “http://” before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server.

c

Press Enter.

The problem is solved. Go to step 3.

Does the Embedded Web Server open?

Troubleshooting 238

Action Yes No

Step 3

Check if the network is working.

a

Print a network setup page.

b

Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected.

Note: If the status is Not Connected, then the connection may be intermittent, or the network cable may be defective. Contact your system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.

c

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.

d

Press Enter.

The problem is solved. Go to step 4.

Does the Embedded Web Server open?

Step 4

Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure.

a

Connect the cables properly. For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.

b

Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.

c

Press Enter.

The problem is solved. Go to step 5.

Does the Embedded Web Server open?

Step 5

Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.

Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.

The problem is solved. Contact your system support person.

Does the Embedded Web Server open?

Contacting customer support

When you contact customer support, you will need to be able to describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the printer display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.

You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label at the back of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.

Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem. Visit the Lexmark Web site at

http://support.lexmark.com

, and then select one of the following:

Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals, support documentation, drivers, and other downloads to help you solve common problems.

E-mail

You can send an e-mail to the Lexmark team, describing your problem. A service representative will respond and provide you with information to solve your problem.

Troubleshooting 239

Live chat

You can chat directly with a service representative. They can work with you to solve your printer problem or provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems, install updates, or complete other tasks to help you successfully use your Lexmark product.

Telephone support is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries or regions, visit

http://support.lexmark.com

.

Notices 240

Notices

Product information

Product name:

Lexmark MX310dn

Machine type:

7015

Model(s):

270

Edition notice

June 2012

The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:

LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time.

References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.

For Lexmark technical support, visit

http://support.lexmark.com

.

For information on supplies and downloads, visit

www.lexmark.com

.

© 2012 Lexmark International, Inc.

All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT END USERS

The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.

2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.

12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.

Government end users (a) only as Commerical Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.

Notices 241

Licensing notices

All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation software CD.

Trademarks

Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries.

Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.

The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for

USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations.

Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:

Director of Lexmark Technology & Services

Lexmark International, Inc.

740 West New Circle Road

Lexington, KY 40550

(859) 232–3000

Notices 242

Noise emission levels

The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

1-meter average sound pressure, dBA

Printing 52 dBA

Scanning

Copying

Ready

45 dBA

54 dBA

N/A

Values are subject to change. See

www.lexmark.com

for current values.

Temperature information

Ambient operating temperature

Shipping and storage temperature

15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)

‑40 to 60°C (-40 to 140°F)

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive

The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European

Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.

If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at

www.lexmark.com

for your local sales office phone number.

Product disposal

Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities for disposal and recycling options.

Notices

Static sensitivity notice

243

This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer.

ENERGY STAR

Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.

Laser notice

The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.

Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.

Laser advisory label

A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:

Notices 244

DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.

PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.

Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.

NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.

FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.

GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.

DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.

VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.

GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.

ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.

VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.

PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.

FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.

NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.

ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.

Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.

PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.

FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.

险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射,请避免暴露在激光光束下。

危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會

產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。

危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。

Power consumption

Product power consumption

The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

Mode

Printing

Copy

Scan

Description

The product is generating hard

‑copy output from electronic inputs.

The product is generating hard

‑copy output from hard‑copy original documents.

The product is scanning hard

‑copy documents.

Power consumption (Watts)

520 W

540 W

30 W

Ready The product is waiting for a print job.

Sleep Mode The product is in a high

‑level energy‑saving mode.

Hibernate The product is in a low

‑level energy‑saving mode.

Off The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power switch is turned off.

12 W

5 W

0.5 W

0 W

The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.

Values are subject to change. See

www.lexmark.com

for current values.

Notices 245

Sleep Mode

This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.

Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 30

By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product.

Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.

Hibernate Mode

This product is designed with an ultra

‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in Hibernate

Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.

The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:

Using the Hibernate Timeout

Using the Schedule Power modes

Using the Sleep/Hibernate button

Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions except for EU countries and

Switzerland

Factory default value for this product in EU countries or regions and Switzerland

Disabled

3 days

The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between one hour and one month.

Off mode

If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.

Total energy usage

It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.

Industry Canada compliance statement

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard

ICES-003.

Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada

Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.

Notices 246

European Community (EC) directives conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC and

2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and the ecodesign of energyrelated products.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.

The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium

Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment

This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal equipment such as facsimile.

Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone company.

This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.

A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your setup documentation for more information.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.

The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.

If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.

at

www.lexmark.com

or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.

Notices 247

This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,

Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.

Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information.

If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.

Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's

Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)

See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.

Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network

This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.

Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s

Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.

This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.

Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada

Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number : numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés

à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.

Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre, entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans

Notices 248 la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.

Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.

Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network

The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services.

This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.

This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.

This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers.

Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom's specifications:

There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and

The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt.

The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.

Using this product in Switzerland

This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland.

Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse

Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.

Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz

Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer

80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden. Die

Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.

Notices 249

Uso del prodotto in Svizzera

Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.

Notice to Users in the European Union

Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,

2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy

‑related products.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.

The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium

Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.

Regulatory notices for wireless products

This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters, for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.

Modular component notice

Wireless

‑equipped models contain the following modular component(s):

Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model LEX-M01-005; FCC ID:IYLLEXM01005; IC:2376A-M01005

Exposure to radio frequency radiation

The following notice is applicable if your printer has a wireless network card installed: The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the

RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.

Notices 250

Notice to users in Brazil

Este equipamento opera em carater secundario, isto e, nao tem direito a protecao contra interferencia prejudicial, mesmo de estacoes do mesmo tipo, e nao pode causar interferencia a sistemas operando em carater primario.

(Res.ANATEL 282/2001).

Industry Canada (Canada)

This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada.

To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.

The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health

Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.

The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

Industry Canada (Canada)

Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes :

(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.

Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.

En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement interdite.

Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.

Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.

L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au

Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.

Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.

Notices

Taiwan NCC RF notice statement

251

Notice to users in the European Union

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC,

1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy-related products.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.

The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium

Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy-related products.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.

The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium

Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.

Notices 252

AT

EL

LI

RO

BE

ES

LT

SE

BG

FI

LU

SI

CH

FR

LV

SK

CY

HR

MT

TR

CZ

HU

NL

UK

DE

IE

NO

DK

IS

PL

EE

IT

PT

Česky

Dansk

Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.

Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.

Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ

ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ

ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.

English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Español

Eesti

Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.

Suomi

Français

Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.

Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

Magyar Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.

Íslenska Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.

Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Latviski Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.

Lietuvių Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas

1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.

Malti Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.

Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.

Norsk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og

øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Notices 253

Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.

Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.

Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.

Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,

LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS

Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY

This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the countryspecific warranty information that came with your product.

This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from

Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”

Limited warranty

Lexmark warrants that this product:

—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts

—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship

If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).

If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the product.

If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user.

Limited warranty service

The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport

Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.

Notices 254

To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.

You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.

When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the

Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.

The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.

Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.

As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted.

Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).

For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact

Lexmark on the World Wide Web.

Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.

Extent of limited warranty

Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product.

Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:

—Modification or unauthorized attachments

—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance

—Unsuitable physical or operating environment

—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer

—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle

—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications

—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts

—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark

TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR

REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH

RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT

MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO

WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,

AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.

Notices 255

Limitation of liability

Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.

Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR

ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.

This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its

Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.

Additional rights

Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.

This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

Index 256

Index

Numerics

250

‑sheet tray

installing 19

550

‑sheet tray

installing 19

Symbols

[x]

‑page jam, clear manual feeder.

[25y.xx] 178

[x]

‑page jam, clear standard bin.

[20y.xx] 175

[x]

‑page jam, open automatic

feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 179

[x]

‑page jam, open front door.

[20y.xx] 171

[x]

‑page jam, open rear door.

[20y.xx] 174

[x]

‑page jam, open tray [x].

[24y.xx] 177

[x]

‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear

duplex. [23y.xx] 176

A

Active NIC menu 108

adapter plug 80

address book button

printer control panel 13

ADF

copying using 56

adjusting printer display

brightness 149

adjusting Sleep mode 148

adjusting toner darkness 51

administrator settings

Embedded Web Server 165

advanced duplex

copy options 67

answering machine

setting up 73

AppleTalk menu 113

arrow buttons

printer control panel 13

attaching cables 22

available internal options 15

avoiding jams 49

avoiding paper jams 168

B

back button

printer control panel 13

binding

fax options 92

blocking junk faxes 89

C

cables

Ethernet 22

USB 22

canceling

fax job 89

print job, from computer 54

canceling a copy job from the

printer control panel 65

canceling a print job

from a computer 54 from the printer control panel 54

canceling an e-mail 70

cannot open Embedded Web

Server 237

card stock

loading, multipurpose feeder 35

tips 49

Cartridge low [88.xy] 181

Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 181

Cartridge very low, [x] estimated

pages remain [88.xy] 181

Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch

[41.xy] 181

Change [paper source] to [custom

string] load [paper orientation] 181

Change [paper source] to [custom

type name] load [orientation] 182

Change [paper source] to [paper

size] load [orientation] 182

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load

[orientation] 182

checking an unresponsive

printer 195

checking status of parts and

supplies 156

checking the status of parts and

supplies 156

checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web

Server 165

cleaning

exterior of the printer 154

scanner glass 155

cleaning the printer 154

Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job

[2yy.xx] 182

Close front door 182

collate

copy options 66

collating copies 62

Complex page, some data may not

have printed [39] 183

compressed images appear on

prints 207

confidential data

information on securing 153

confidential jobs

modifying print settings 53

confidential print jobs 52

printing from a Macintosh

computer 53 printing from Windows 53

configuration information

wireless network 26

configurations

printer 10

Configure MP menu 101

configuring supply notifications, imaging

unit 166

supply notifications, maintenance

kit 166

supply notifications, toner

cartridge 166

configuring e

‑mail settings 68

configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web

Server 166

connecting to a wireless network using PBC, Push Button

Configuration method 27

using PIN, Personal Identification

Number method 27

Index 257 using the Embedded Web

Server 28

using wireless setup wizard 27

conservation settings

brightness, adjusting 149

conserving supplies 146

Eco

‑Mode 147

Hibernate mode 149

Quiet mode 147

Schedule Power Modes 150

Sleep mode 148

conserving supplies 146

contacting customer support 238

control panel, printer

indicator light 13

Sleep button light 13

controller board

accessing 15

copies

copy options 65

copy from

copy options 65

copy job

canceling 65

copy options

advanced duplex 67

collate 66

copies 65 copy from 65 copy to 65

darkness 66

overlay 67 paper saver 67

scale 66

separator sheets 67

sides (duplex) 66

copy quality

adjusting 61

copy screen

content source 66

content type 66, 91

Copy Settings menu 121

copy to

copy options 65

copy troubleshooting

copier does not respond 224

partial document or photo

copies 226

poor copy quality 225

poor scanned image quality 236

scanner unit does not

close 225, 235

copying

adding an overlay message 64

adjusting quality 61

canceling a copy job from the

printer control panel 65

collating copies 62

enlarging 61 making a copy lighter or darker 61

multiple pages on one sheet 63

on both sides of the paper

(duplexing) 60

on letterhead 58

on transparencies 57 photos 57

placing separator sheets between

copies 63

quick copy 56

reducing 61

selecting a tray 59 to a different size 59

using the ADF 56

using the scanner glass 57

creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web

Server 87

creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web

Server 93

custom paper type

assigning 41

custom paper type name

creating 40

custom paper type names

assigning 40

Custom Scan Sizes menu 106

Custom Type [x]

assigning a paper type 41

Custom Type [x] name

creating 40

Custom Types menu 105

customer support

contacting 238

D

darkness

copy options 66

fax options 91

date and time, fax

setting 85 daylight savings time, faxing 85

Default Source menu 98

Defective flash detected [51] 183

Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)

fax setup 77

digital telephone service

fax setup 79

display troubleshooting

printer display is blank 197

display, printer control panel

adjusting brightness 149

distinctive ring service

connecting to 84

documents, printing

from Macintosh 51 from Windows 51

DSL filter 77

duplexing

copy jobs 60

E

Eco

‑Mode setting 147

Embedded Web Server

adjusting brightness 149

administrator settings 165

checking the status of parts 156

checking the status of

supplies 156

creating a fax destination

shortcut 87

creating an FTP shortcut 93

creating e

‑mail shortcuts 69

initial fax setup 72

modifying confidential print

settings 53

networking settings 165

problem accessing 237

setting up e

‑mail alerts 165

Embedded Web Server

Administrator's Guide

where to find 153, 165

emission

notices 241, 242, 245, 246, 249,

250, 251

enlarging a copy 61

envelopes

loading, multipurpose feeder 35

tips on using 48

environmental settings

conserving supplies 146

Eco

‑Mode 147

Hibernate mode 149

printer display brightness,

adjusting 149

Quiet mode 147

Index 258

Schedule Power Modes 150

Sleep mode 148

erasing non

‑volatile memory 152 erasing volatile memory 152

Error reading USB drive. Remove

USB. 183

Error reading USB hub. Remove

hub. 183

Ethernet network preparing to set up for Ethernet

printing 24

Ethernet network setup

using Macintosh 25 using Windows 25

Ethernet networking

Macintosh 25

Windows 25

Ethernet port 22

Ethernet setup

preparing for an 24

EXT ports 22

exterior of the printer

cleaning 154

e

‑mail

canceling 70

e

‑mail alerts

low supply levels 165 paper jam 165 setting up 165

e

‑mail function

setting up 68

E

‑mail Settings menu 130

e

‑mail shortcuts, creating using the Embedded Web

Server 69

e

‑mail, sending

using a shortcut number 69 using the address book 69

e

‑mailing configuring e

‑mail settings 68

creating shortcuts using the

Embedded Web Server 69

setting up e

‑mail function 68

using a shortcut number 69 using the address book 69

F

factory defaults, restoring 167

fax

options 91, 92

sending 86

fax button

printer control panel 13

fax connection connecting to a distinctive ring

service 84

fax function

setting up 227 fax function is not set up 227

fax log

viewing 89

Fax memory full 183

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)

menu 124

fax options

binding 92

darkness 91

orientation 92

resolution 91

Fax partition inoperative. Contact

system administrator. 183

fax ports 22

fax screen

content source 92

Fax server 'To Format' not set up.

Contact system administrator. 183

fax setup country

‑ or region‑specific 80

digital telephone service 79

DSL connection 77

standard telephone line

connection 73

VoIP 78

Fax Station Name not set up.

Contact system administrator. 184

Fax Station Number not set up.

Contact system administrator. 184

fax troubleshooting

caller ID is not shown 228

can receive but not send

faxes 232

can send but not receive

faxes 231

cannot send or receive a fax 229

received fax has poor print

quality 233

fax, sending

using shortcuts 86

using the address book 87

using the printer control panel 85

faxing

blocking junk faxes 89 canceling a fax job 89, 90

changing resolution 88

configuring the printer to observe

daylight saving time 85

creating shortcuts using the

Embedded Web Server 87

fax setup 72

forwarding faxes 90 holding faxes 90

making a fax lighter or darker 88

sending a fax at a scheduled

time 87

setting the date and time 85

setting the fax number or station

number 84

setting the outgoing fax name or

station name 84

viewing a fax log 89

FCC notices 241, 246, 249

finding more information about the

printer 8

Finishing menu 137

font sample list

printing 54

forwarding faxes 90

FTP address, scanning to

using a shortcut 94

FTP Settings menu 133

G

General Settings menu 116

green settings

Eco

‑Mode 147

Hibernate mode 149

Quiet mode 147

Schedule Power Modes 150

H

held jobs 52

printing from a Macintosh

computer 53 printing from Windows 53

Help menu 144

Hibernate mode

using 149

holding faxes 90

home button

printer control panel 13

HTML menu 143

I

Image menu 144

Index 259 imaging unit

ordering 158

replacing 161

Imaging unit low [84.xy] 184

Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy] 184

Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated

pages remain [84.xy] 184

Incorrect paper size, open [paper

source] [34] 184

indicator light

printer control panel 13

initial fax setup 72

using the Embedded Web

Server 72

installing an optional card 17

installing options

order of installation 19

installing printer on a network

Ethernet networking 25

installing printer software 23 adding options 23

installing the 250

‑sheet tray 19

installing the 550

‑sheet tray 19

Insufficient memory for Flash

Memory Defragment operation

[37] 185

Insufficient memory to collate job

[37] 185

Insufficient memory to support

Resource Save feature [35] 185

Insufficient memory, some Held

Jobs were deleted [37] 185

Insufficient memory, some held

jobs will not be restored [37] 185

IPv6 menu 111

J

jams

accessing 169

avoiding 168

understanding messages 169

jams, clearing in automatic document feeder top

cover 179

in duplex area 176

in front door 171

in manual feeder 178

in rear door 174

in standard bin 175

in tray [x] 177

K

keypad

printer control panel 13

L

labels, paper

tips 48

letterhead

copying on 58

loading, multipurpose feeder 35

tips on using 47

line filter 77

LINE ports 22

linking trays 39

assigning custom paper type

names 40

Load [paper source] with [custom

string] [paper orientation] 187

Load [paper source] with [custom

type name] [paper orientation] 187

Load [paper source] with [paper

size] [paper orientation] 187

Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper

orientation] 187

Load manual feeder with [custom

string] [paper orientation] 186

Load manual feeder with [custom

type name] [paper orientation] 186

Load manual feeder with [paper

size] [paper orientation] 186

Load manual feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper

orientation] 186

loading

multipurpose feeder 35

trays 30 loading the optional tray 30 loading the standard tray 30

M

maintenance kit

ordering 158

Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 188

Maintenance kit nearly low

[80.xy] 188

Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain

[80.xy] 188

memory

types installed on printer 152

Memory full [38] 188

Memory full, cannot print

faxes 188

Memory full, cannot send

faxes 188

menu settings page

printing 29

menus

Active NIC 108

AppleTalk 113

Configure MP 101

Copy Settings 121

Custom Scan Sizes 106

Custom Types 105

Default Source 98

E

‑mail Settings 130

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 124

Finishing 137

FTP Settings 133

General Settings 116

Help 144

HTML 143

Image 144

IPv6 111

list of 97

Network [x] 108

Network Card 109

Network Reports 109

Paper Loading 104

Paper Size/Type 98

Paper Texture 101

Paper Weight 103

PCL Emul 140

PDF 140

Quality 139

Reports 107

Security Audit Log 114

Set Date and Time 115

Setup 136

SMTP Setup menu 113

Standard Network 108

Substitute Size 101

TCP/IP 110

Universal Setup 106

Wireless 112

XPS 140

menus list 97

moving the printer 9, 163, 164

multiple pages on one sheet 63

multipurpose feeder

loading 35

Index 260

N

Network [x] menu 108

Network [x] software error

[54] 189

Network Card menu 109

Network Reports menu 109

network settings

Embedded Web Server 165

network setup page

printing 29

Networking Guide

where to find 165

No analog phone line connected to

modem, fax is disabled. 189

noise emission levels 242

noise, printer

reducing 147

Non

‑Lexmark [supply type], see

User’s Guide [33.xy] 189

non

‑volatile memory 152 erasing 152

Not enough free space in flash

memory for resources [52] 189

notices 241, 242, 243, 244, 245,

246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251

number of remaining pages

estimate 156

O

optional card

installing 17

optional tray

loading 30

options

250

‑sheet tray, installing 19

550

‑sheet tray, installing 19

fax 91, 92

memory cards 15

updating in printer driver 23

ordering

imaging unit 158 maintenance kit 158

ordering supplies

toner cartridges 157

orientation

fax options 92

overlay

copy options 67

overlay message, adding

copying 64

P

paper

characteristics 42

letterhead 43

loading, multipurpose feeder 35

preprinted forms 43

recycled 44, 146

selecting 43

setting size 30 setting type 30

storing 49

unacceptable 43

Universal size setting 30

paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is

cleared 200

paper jams

avoiding 168

paper jams, clearing in automatic document feeder top

cover 179

in duplex area 176

in front door 171

in manual feeder 178

in rear door 174

in standard bin 175

in tray [x] 177

paper labels

loading, multipurpose feeder 35

Paper Loading menu 104

paper messages

[x]

‑page jam, remove tray 1 to

clear duplex. [23y.xx] 176

paper saver

copy options 67

Paper Size/Type menu 98

paper sizes

supported 45

Paper Texture menu 101

paper types

supported by printer 46 where to load 46

Paper Weight menu 103

paper weights

supported by printer 46

parts

checking status 156

checking, using the Embedded

Web Server 156

using genuine Lexmark 157

parts and supplies, status of checking, on printer control

panel 156

PCL Emul menu 140

PDF menu 140

Personal Identification Number method

using 27

phone splitter 78

photos

copying 57

placing separator sheets between

copies 63

preparing to set up the printer on

an Ethernet network 24

print irregularities 211

print job canceling from the printer control

panel 54 canceling, from computer 54

print quality

cleaning the scanner glass 155

print quality troubleshooting

blank pages 215

characters have jagged edges 206 clipped pages or images 206

compressed images appear on

prints 207

gray background on prints 208

horizontal voids appear on

prints 209

print irregularities 211

print is too dark 213

print is too light 214

printer is printing solid black

pages 216

repeating print defects appear on

prints 217

shadow images appear on

prints 218 skewed print 218

streaked horizontal lines appear

on prints 219

streaked vertical lines 220

toner fog or background

shading 221

toner rubs off 222 toner specks appear on prints 222

transparency print quality is

poor 222

uneven print density 223 white streaks 223

Index 261 print troubleshooting

incorrect characters print 200

incorrect margins on prints 210

jammed pages are not

reprinted 199

job prints from wrong tray 200 job prints on wrong paper 200

jobs do not print 202

Large jobs do not collate 201

multiple

‑language PDF files do not

print 202

paper curl 211

paper frequently jams 199

print job takes longer than

expected 203

tray linking does not work 205

unexpected page breaks

occur 205

printer

minimum clearances 9

moving 9, 163, 164

selecting a location 9

shipping 164

printer configurations 10 basic model 10 configured model 10

printer control panel

adjusting brightness 149

factory defaults, restoring 167

indicator light 13

Sleep button light 13 using 13

printer control panel, virtual display using the Embedded Web

Server 165

Printer had to restart. Last job may

be incomplete. 190

printer information

where to find 8

printer is printing blank pages 215

printer messages

[x]

‑page jam, clear manual feeder.

[25y.xx] 178

[x]

‑page jam, clear standard bin.

[20y.xx] 175

[x]

‑page jam, open automatic

feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 179

[x]

‑page jam, open front door.

[20y.xx] 171

[x]

‑page jam, open rear door.

[20y.xx] 174

[x]

‑page jam, open tray [x].

[24y.xx] 177

Cartridge low [88.xy] 181

Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 181

Cartridge very low, [x] estimated

pages remain [88.xy] 181

Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch

[41.xy] 181

Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [paper

orientation] 181

Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load

[orientation] 182

Change [paper source] to [paper

size] load [orientation] 182

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load

[orientation] 182

Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job

[2yy.xx] 182

Close front door 182

Complex page, some data may not

have printed [39] 183

Defective flash detected [51] 183

Error reading USB drive. Remove

USB. 183

Error reading USB hub. Remove

hub. 183

Fax memory full 183

Fax partition inoperative. Contact

system administrator. 183

Fax server 'To Format' not set up.

Contact system

administrator. 183

Fax Station Name not set up.

Contact system

administrator. 184

Fax Station Number not set up.

Contact system

administrator. 184

Imaging unit low [84.xy] 184

Imaging unit nearly low

[84.xy] 184

Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain

[84.xy] 184

Incorrect paper size, open [paper

source] [34] 184

Insufficient memory for Flash

Memory Defragment operation

[37] 185

Insufficient memory to collate job

[37] 185

Insufficient memory to support

Resource Save feature [35] 185

Insufficient memory, some Held

Jobs were deleted [37] 185

Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored

[37] 185

Load [paper source] with [custom

string] [paper orientation] 187

Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper

orientation] 187

Load [paper source] with [paper

size] [paper orientation] 187

Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper

orientation] 187

Load manual feeder with [custom

string] [paper orientation] 186

Load manual feeder with [custom type name] [paper

orientation] 186

Load manual feeder with [paper

size] [paper orientation] 186

Load manual feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper

orientation] 186

Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 188

Maintenance kit nearly low

[80.xy] 188

Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain

[80.xy] 188

Memory full [38] 188

Memory full, cannot print

faxes 188

Memory full, cannot send

faxes 188

Network [x] software error

[54] 189

No analog phone line connected

to modem, fax is disabled. 189

Non

‑Lexmark [supply type], see

User’s Guide [33.xy] 189

Not enough free space in flash

memory for resources [52] 189

Index 262

Printer had to restart. Last job

may be incomplete. 190

Reinstall missing or unresponsive

cartridge [31.xy] 190

Reinstall missing or unresponsive

imaging unit [31.xy] 190

Remove paper from standard

output bin 190

Replace all originals if restarting

job. 190

Replace cartridge, 0 estimated

pages remain [88.xy] 191

Replace cartridge, printer region

mismatch [42.xy] 191

Replace defective imaging unit

[31.xy] 191

Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated

pages remain [84.xy] 191

Replace jammed originals if

restarting job. 192

Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain

[80.xy] 192

Replace unsupported cartridge

[32.xy] 192

Replace unsupported imaging unit

[32.xy] 192

Scanner automatic feeder cover

open 192

Scanner disabled by admin

[840.01] 192

Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists.

[840.02] 193

Scanner jam, remove all originals

from the scanner [2yy.xx] 193

Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner

[2yy.xx] 193

Serial option [x] error [54] 193

SMTP server not set up. Contact

system administrator. 193, 195

Standard network software error

[54] 193

Standard USB port disabled

[56] 194

Supply needed to complete

job 194

Too many flash options installed

[58] 194

Too many trays attached [58] 194

Unformatted flash detected

[53] 194

Unsupported USB hub, please

remove 183

printer options troubleshooting internal option is not

detected 197

tray problems 198

printer problems, solving basic 195

printer security

information on 153

printer software

installing 23

printing

font sample list 54

from Macintosh 51 from Windows 51

menu settings page 29 network setup page 29

printing a document 51

printing a network setup page 29

printing confidential and other held jobs

from a Macintosh computer 53 from Windows 53

printing slows down 204

publications

where to find 8

Push Button Configuration method

using 27

Q

Quality menu 139

Quiet mode 147

R

recycled paper

using 44, 146

recycling

Lexmark packaging 151

Lexmark products 150

toner cartridges 151

reducing a copy 61

reducing noise 147

Reinstall missing or unresponsive

cartridge [31.xy] 190

Reinstall missing or unresponsive

imaging unit [31.xy] 190

Remove paper from standard

output bin 190

repeat print jobs 52

printing from a Macintosh

computer 53 printing from Windows 53

repeating print defects appear on

prints 217

Replace all originals if restarting

job. 190

Replace cartridge, 0 estimated

pages remain [88.xy] 191

Replace cartridge, printer region

mismatch [42.xy] 191

Replace defective imaging unit

[31.xy] 191

Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated

pages remain [84.xy] 191

Replace jammed originals if

restarting job. 192

Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain

[80.xy] 192

Replace unsupported cartridge

[32.xy] 192

Replace unsupported imaging unit

[32.xy] 192

replacing

imaging unit 161

toner cartridge 159

reports

viewing 165

Reports menu 107

reserve print jobs 52

printing from a Macintosh

computer 53 printing from Windows 53

reset button

printer control panel 13

resolution

fax options 91

resolution, fax

changing 88

RJ

‑11 adapter 80

S

safety information 6, 7

scale

copy options 66

scan troubleshooting partial document or photo

scans 237

scan job was not successful 235

Index 263 scanner unit does not

close 225, 235

scanning takes too long or freezes

the computer 235

scanner

Automatic document feeder

(ADF) 12

functions 11

scanner glass 12

Scanner automatic feeder cover

open 192

Scanner disabled by admin

[840.01] 192

Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists.

[840.02] 193

scanner glass

cleaning 155

copying using 57

Scanner jam, remove all originals

from the scanner [2yy.xx] 193

Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner

[2yy.xx] 193

scanning

quick copy 56

to a computer 95

using the address book 94

scanning to a computer 95

scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the

computer 93

using a shortcut 94

scanning, FTP address

using the address book 94

Schedule Power Modes

using 150

security modifying confidential print

settings 53

Security Audit Log menu 114

security slot 22

security Web page

where to find 153

select button

printer control panel 13

selecting a location for the

printer 9

selecting paper 43

sending a fax 86

sending fax

using shortcuts 86

using the address book 87

using the printer control panel 85

sending fax at a scheduled time 87

separator pad

ordering 158

separator sheets

copy options 67

Serial option [x] error [54] 193

Set Date and Time menu 115

setting

paper size 30 paper type 30

TCP/IP address 110

setting the fax number or station

number 84

setting the outgoing fax name or

station name 84

setting the Universal paper size 30

setting up e

‑mail alerts 165

setting up fax country

‑ or region‑specific 80

digital telephone service 79

DSL connection 77

standard telephone line

connection 73

VoIP connection 78

setting up fax function 227

setting up the printer on an Ethernet network

(Macintosh only) 25

on an Ethernet network (Windows

only) 25

Setup menu 136

shipping the printer 164

shortcuts, creating e

‑mail 69

fax destination 87

FTP destination 93

sides (duplex)

copy options 66

sleep button

printer control panel 13

Sleep mode

adjusting 148

SMTP server not set up. Contact

system administrator. 193, 195

SMTP Setup menu 113

Standard Network menu 108

Standard network software error

[54] 193

standard tray

loading 30

Standard USB port disabled

[56] 194

start button

printer control panel 13

statement of volatility 152

status of parts and supplies

checking 156

stop or cancel button

printer control panel 13

storing

paper 49

supplies 159

storing print jobs 52

streaked horizontal lines appear on

prints 219

streaked vertical lines appear on

prints 220

streaks appear 223

Substitute Size menu 101

supplies

checking status 156

checking, using the Embedded

Web Server 156

conserving 146

storing 159

using genuine Lexmark 157

using recycled paper 146

supplies, ordering

imaging unit 158 maintenance kit 158 separator pad 158

toner cartridges 157

Supply needed to complete job 194

supply notifications

configuring 166

supported paper sizes 45

T

TCP/IP menu 110

telecommunication

notices 246, 247, 248, 249

the scanner does not respond 234

tips

card stock 49

labels, paper 48

letterhead 47

on using envelopes 48 transparencies 48 tips on using envelopes 48

toner cartridge

replacing 159

Index 264 toner cartridges

ordering 157

recycling 151

toner darkness

adjusting 51

Too many flash options installed

[58] 194

Too many trays attached [58] 194

transparencies

copying on 57

loading, multipurpose feeder 35

tips 48

trays

linking 39

loading 30

unlinking 39

troubleshooting cannot open Embedded Web

Server 237

checking an unresponsive

printer 195

contacting customer support 238

fax function is not set up 227

solving basic printer

problems 195

the scanner does not respond 234

troubleshooting, copy

copier does not respond 224

partial document or photo

copies 226

poor copy quality 225

poor scanned image quality 236

scanner unit does not

close 225, 235

troubleshooting, display

printer display is blank 197

troubleshooting, fax

caller ID is not shown 228

can receive but not send

faxes 232

can send but not receive

faxes 231

cannot send or receive a fax 229

received fax has poor print

quality 233

troubleshooting, paper feed message remains after jam is

cleared 200

troubleshooting, print

incorrect characters print 200

incorrect margins on prints 210

jammed pages are not

reprinted 199

job prints from wrong tray 200 job prints on wrong paper 200

jobs do not print 202

Large jobs do not collate 201

multiple

‑language PDF files do not

print 202

paper curl 211

paper frequently jams 199

print job takes longer than

expected 203

tray linking does not work 205

unexpected page breaks

occur 205

troubleshooting, print quality

blank pages 215

characters have jagged edges 206 clipped pages or images 206

compressed images appear on

prints 207

gray background on prints 208

horizontal voids appear on

prints 209

print irregularities 211

print is too dark 213

print is too light 214

printer is printing solid black

pages 216

repeating print defects appear on

prints 217

shadow images appear on

prints 218 skewed print 218

streaked horizontal lines appear

on prints 219

streaked vertical lines 220

toner fog or background

shading 221

toner rubs off 222 toner specks appear on prints 222

transparency print quality is

poor 222

uneven print density 223 white streaks on a page 223

troubleshooting, printer options internal option is not

detected 197

tray problems 198

troubleshooting, printing

printing slows down 204

troubleshooting, scan partial document or photo

scans 237

scan job was not successful 235

scanner unit does not

close 225, 235

scanning takes too long or freezes

the computer 235

U

unacceptable paper 43

uneven print density 223

Unformatted flash detected

[53] 194

Universal paper size

setting 30

Universal Setup menu 106

unlinking trays 39

Unsupported USB hub, please

remove 183

updating options in printer

driver 23

USB port 22

using Hibernate mode 149

using Schedule Power Modes 150

using shortcuts

sending fax 86

using the address book

sending fax 87

V

verify print jobs 52

printing from a Macintosh

computer 53 printing from Windows 53

vertical voids appear 223

viewing

reports 165

viewing a fax log 89

virtual display checking, using Embedded Web

Server 165

voice mail

setting up 73

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

fax setup 78

voids appear 223

VoIP adapter 78

volatile memory 152 erasing 152

Index volatility

statement of 152

W

Wireless menu 112

wireless network

configuration information 26

wireless network setup using the Embedded Web

Server 28

wireless setup wizard

using 27

X

XPS menu 140

265

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents